2022 GRAND WAGONEER/WAGONEER
OWNER’S MANUAL
2022 GRAND WAGONEER
WAGONEER
Fifth Edition V2
22_WS_OM_EN_USC
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an
accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Wagoneer brand vehicle. Simply download the
app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword
“Wagoneer” (U.S. residents only).
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Wagoneer is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Wagoneer est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear
gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual
may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/
or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-833-667-4825 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or
purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an
accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their
attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the
driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done
while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your
vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with
all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Wagoneer vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or
your local Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the
legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have
been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................... 8 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE.................................................. 17 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .................................. 89 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING.......................................................... 110 4
5 MULTIMEDIA ........................................................................... 179 5
6 SAFETY ................................................................................. 217 6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY............................................................. 261 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE.................................................... 278 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 330 9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE............................................................. 336
10
11 INDEX ................................................................................... 339
11
INTRODUCTION
KNOW&GO........................9
SYMBOLS KEY ......................10
ROLLOVER WARNING .................10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......11
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY ..................11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ........................... 17
KeyFob .......................17
SENTRY KEY .......................20
IGNITION SWITCH .................... 20
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .......... 20
REMOTE START .....................22
How To Use Remote Start ............. 22
To Exit Remote Start Mode ............ 22
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped .....................23
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . 23
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer Activation —
If Equipped .....................23
Remote Start Abort Message ...........23
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....23
To Arm The System ................ 23
To Disarm The System ...............24
Rearming Of The System ............. 24
Security System Manual Override ......... 24
TamperAlert ..................... 24
DELUXE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . 24
To Arm The System .................24
To Disarm The System ............... 25
Security System Manual Override ........ 25
DOORS .......................... 25
Manual Door Locks ................ 25
Power Door Locks .................26
Power Side Steps — If Equipped .........26
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry ......27
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit ......... 29
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ....... 29
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors . 29
STEERING WHEEL ...................29
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ..... 29
Heated Steering Wheel .............. 30
DRIVER AND PASSENGER MEMORY SETTINGS —
IF EQUIPPED ....................... 30
Programming The Memory Feature ........ 31
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To Memory . 31
Memory Position Recall .............. 32
SEATS ..........................32
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) .........32
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped . 37
Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) — If Equipped . 39
Power Seat Massage — If Equipped ....... 40
Heated Seats — If Equipped ........... 41
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped ..........42
Head Restraints .................. 42
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS —
IF EQUIPPED ....................... 46
Introducing Voice Recognition ........... 46
Basic Voice Commands ..............46
Get Started ..................... 47
Additional Information ...............47
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS ............. 47
MIRRORS ........................ 48
InsideRearviewMirror ............... 48
IlluminatedVanityMirrors .............49
Outside Mirrors ................... 49
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped ..................... 49
Conversation Mirror ................ 49
PowerMirrors ................... 50
Automatic Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped . . 50
Heated Mirrors ................... 51
TiltSideMirrorsInReverse ............51
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HomeLink®) . . 51
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . 51
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ...... 52
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
Non-Rolling Code Device .............. 52
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener ........................52
Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
Device ........................ 53
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button . . 53
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .....53
Security ....................... 54
Troubleshooting Tips ................ 54
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...................54
Headlight Switch ..................54
Multifunction Lever .................55
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) ..........55
High/Low Beam Switch .............. 55
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped ...... 55
Flash-To-Pass ....................56
Automatic Headlights ............... 56
Parking Lights And Panel Lights ......... 56
2
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers ....56
Headlight Illumination On Approach ....... 56
Headlight Delay ...................57
Lights-On Reminder ................ 57
Fog Lights ......................57
Turn Signals ..................... 57
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ........57
Battery Saver ....................57
INTERIOR LIGHTS ....................58
Courtesy Lights ................... 58
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ........59
Windshield Wiper Operation ............ 60
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ....... 60
Rear Wiper And Washer ..............61
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped ..... 61
CLIMATE CONTROLS ..................61
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ...................... 61
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...... 67
Climate Voice Recognition ............. 68
Operating Tips ................... 68
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ........69
Storage ....................... 69
Center Console Cooler — If Equipped ...... 71
Center Console Safe — If Equipped ....... 71
Sun Screens — If Equipped ............ 72
USB/AUX Control ..................72
Electrical Power Outlets .............. 74
PowerInverter ...................75
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ...... 76
WINDOWS ........................ 77
Power Window Controls .............. 77
WindBuffeting ................... 78
Radio Signal Devices On Windshield —
If Equipped ..................... 78
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .......... 78
Tri-Pane Power Sunroof .............. 78
HOOD ........................... 80
Opening The Hood .................80
Closing The Hood ..................81
LIFTGATE .........................81
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate ........... 81
To Lock/Close The Liftgate ............ 81
Adjustable Power Liftgate Height .........81
Hands-Free Liftgate ................ 82
Cargo Area Features ................ 83
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ........ 85
Installing The Crossbars ..............85
Removing The Crossbars .............88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .............89
Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions ...... 90
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..........91
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . 92
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........92
Location And Controls ...............93
Engine Oil Life Reset ................ 95
Display And Messages ............... 95
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ..... 96
Head Up Display (HUD) — If Equipped ...... 98
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions (If Equipped) . . 99
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .........100
Red Warning Lights ................ 100
Yellow Warning Lights .............. 103
Yellow Indicator Lights .............. 106
Green Indicator Lights .............. 107
White Indicator Lights .............. 108
Blue Indicator Lights ............... 108
Gray Indicator Lights ............... 108
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ..... 108
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ................... 109
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ......................109
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ................110
Automatic Transmission .............110
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition ........ 110
Normal Starting .................. 110
AutoPark ......................111
If Engine Fails To Start ..............112
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............ 112
After Starting ................... 112
Turbocharger “Cool Down” —
3.0L Engine Only .................112
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ...... 112
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ......113
PARKING BRAKE ................... 113
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ............ 113
3
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .............115
IgnitionParkInterlock ..............116
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ....................... 116
8-Speed Automatic Transmission ........116
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ..........119
Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped ............ 119
Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped ............ 119
ShiftPositions ................... 119
Shifting Procedures ................ 120
Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped ..... 120
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED ........... 120
Selec-Terrain Mode Selection .......... 120
Instrument Cluster Display Messages ..... 121
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED ............121
Description .................... 121
Air Suspension Modes ..............123
Instrument Cluster Display Messages ..... 123
Operation ..................... 123
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L AND 6.4L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED ......................124
POWER STEERING ..................124
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED........124
AutostopMode .................. 124
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop ...................... 125
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . 125
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . 125
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . 125
System Malfunction ............... 125
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED ....126
Cruise Control .................. 126
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .......... 127
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . 134
Activation/Deactivation ............. 134
Traffic Sign Assist Modes ............ 134
Indications On The Display ............ 134
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . 135
Operation ..................... 135
Turning Active Driving Assist On Or Off ..... 137
Indications On The Display ............ 138
System Status ................... 139
System Operation/Limitations .......... 139
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM .........................140
ParkSense Sensors ................ 141
ParkSense Display ................ 141
ParkSense Warning Display ...........144
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ....... 144
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . 144
Cleaning The ParkSense System ........ 144
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ..... 144
Side Distance Warning System — If Equipped . 145
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ......................146
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System ................ 147
ParkSense Automated Parking — If Equipped . 148
Semi-Automatic ParkSense Active Park Assist —
If Equipped .................... 151
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ...................... 153
Active Lane Management Operation ...... 153
Turning Active Lane Management On Or Off . . 154
Active Lane Management Warning Message . 154
Changing Active Lane Management Status . . 155
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........156
Zoom View ..................... 156
Vie
wing At Speed ................. 157
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..........157
NIGHT VISION CAMERA SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . 157
Detection Range ................. 159
Service The Night Vision System ........159
Night Vision System Limitations ......... 159
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . 160
Zoom View ..................... 161
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ............... 162
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release ...... 163
VEHICLE LOADING ................... 163
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ......163
Payload ....................... 163
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ........ 163
TireSize ......................163
RimSize ...................... 163
Inflation Pressure ................. 163
Curb Weight .................... 164
Loading ...................... 164
TRAILER TOWING ...................164
CommonTowingDefinitions ...........164
Trailer Hitch Classification ............167
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ....... 167
4
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped .................... 169
Trailer And Tongue Weight ............ 169
Towing Requirements .............. 169
TowingTips ....................172
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME) . 173
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . 173
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models .......................174
Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I
(Single-Speed Transfer Case)
Four-Wheel Drive Models ............. 174
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II/
Quadra–Drive II Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . 174
DRIVING TIPS ...................... 176
On-Road Driving Tips ............... 176
Off-RoadDrivingTips ............... 176
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .................179
CYBERSECURITY ...................179
UCONNECT SETTINGS .................179
Customer Programmable Features ....... 180
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ........ 200
Radio Operation .................. 201
MediaMode ....................201
PASSENGER SCREEN — IF EQUIPPED ....... 201
Passenger Screen Permissions .........201
Home Screen ................... 202
AudioAndVideo .................. 203
Rear Seat Entertainment With Amazon Fire TV
Built-In — If Equipped ............... 204
HDMI Projecting .................. 204
Device Manager ..................204
Navigation ..................... 204
Camera ...................... 205
3RD PARTY APPS — IF EQUIPPED ......... 205
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) WITH
AMAZON FIRE TV BUILT-IN — IF EQUIPPED ..... 206
Overview ...................... 206
Getting Started ..................206
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in from the Front Radio Screen .......207
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in from the Rear Screens ........... 207
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in from the Passenger Screen —
If Equipped .....................207
First Time Starting Up
(Using the Rear Screens) ............. 207
Alexa Voice Control ................ 208
Listen Via Vehicle Speakers ...........208
QuickMenu .................... 208
Parental Controls (Using the Rear Screens) . . 208
Voice Remote with Alexa Pairing
(Using the Rear Screens) .............208
Media Sources Input
(Using the Front Radio and Rear Screens) . . . 209
VoiceRemotewithAlexa ............. 209
Replacing the Voice Remote with Alexa
Batteries ...................... 210
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV Built-In
streaming (Using the Front Radio and Rear
Screens) ...................... 210
Fire TV Apps/Games
(Using the Rear Screens) ............. 211
Are We There Yet? ................. 211
UsingTheVideoUSBPort ............ 211
PlayVideoGames ................. 211
Headphones Operation ..............211
Rear Climate Controls .............. 212
Legal & Compliance ............... 213
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED .......... 214
Off-Road Pages Status Bar ............214
Vehicle Dynamics ................. 214
Accessory Gauges ................ 215
Pitch&Roll .................... 215
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped ........... 215
Suspension .................... 215
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ..... 216
Regulatory And Safety Information ....... 216
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ...................217
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .......... 217
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) ........ 217
Drowsy Driver Detection (DDD) — If Equipped . 218
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System .... 218
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ............ 224
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) ...........224
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation ..................... 227
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . 229
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .......... 233
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ..... 233
Important Safety Precautions .......... 233
Seat Belt Systems ................ 234
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .... 240
Child Restraints .................. 249
5
SAFETY TIPS ...................... 258
Transporting Passengers ............. 258
Transporting Pets ................ 258
Connected Vehicles ................ 258
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ....................... 259
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ............... 260
Exhaust Gas ................... 260
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...........260
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........261
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM— IF EQUIPPED ..... 261
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........... 263
Preparations For Jacking ............ 264
Jack And Tools Location ............. 264
Spare Tire Stowage ............... 265
Spare Tire Removal ............... 266
Jacking Instructions ............... 267
JUMP STARTING ....................270
Preparations For Jump Start ........... 270
Jump Starting Procedure ............. 271
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY .............272
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS............. 273
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ............... 273
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............. 274
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........275
Rear-Wheel Drive Models ............ 276
Four-Wheel Drive Models ............. 276
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ...... 277
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) . 277
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ........... 277
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ............... 278
Maintenance Plan ................. 278
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ............... 281
3.0L Engine .................... 281
5.7L Engine ....................282
6.4L Engine ....................283
Checking Oil Level — 3.0L Engine ....... 284
Checking Oil Level 5.7L & 6.4L Engines .... 285
Adding Washer Fluid ............... 285
Maintenance-Free Battery ............285
Pressure Washing .................286
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ...............286
Engine Oil ..................... 286
Engine Oil Filter .................. 287
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............. 287
Air Conditioner Maintenance .......... 288
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ......... 290
Body Lubrication ................. 290
Windshield Wiper Blades ............ 291
Exhaust System ................. 292
Cooling System .................. 293
Brake System ...................295
Automatic Transmission ............. 295
Front/Rear Axle Fluid .............. 296
Transfer Case ................... 297
Fuses .......................297
Bulb Replacement ................ 313
TIRES ..........................313
TireSafetyInformation .............. 313
Tires — General Information ........... 319
Tire Types ..................... 321
Spare Tires — If Equipped ............322
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........... 323
Snow Traction Devices .............. 324
Tire Rotation Recommendations ........326
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE
QUALITY GRADES ...................326
Treadwear .....................326
Traction Grades ..................326
Temperature Grades ............... 327
STORING THE VEHICLE ................ 327
BODYWORK.......................327
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ...... 327
Body And Underbody Maintenance ....... 327
Preserving The Bodywork ............ 328
INTERIORS ....................... 328
Seats And Fabric Parts ..............328
Plastic And Coated Parts ............. 328
Leather Surfaces ................. 329
Glass Surfaces .................. 329
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ......330
BRAKE SYSTEM ....................330
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . 330
Torque Specifications ............... 330
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ................ 331
3.0L High Output Engine ............ 331
5.7L Engine .................... 331
6.4L Engine .................... 331
Reformulated Gasoline ............. 331
Materials Added To Fuel ............. 331
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .......... 332
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . 332
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .... 332
6
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) In Gasoline ................332
Fuel System Cautions .............. 332
FLUID CAPACITIES ................... 333
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ......... 334
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ........ 335
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR
VEHICLE ........................336
Prepare For The Appointment .......... 336
Prepare A List ................... 336
Be Reasonable With Requests ......... 336
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............336
FCA US LLC Customer Center ..........336
Wagoneer Client Services Canada ....... 336
Mexico .......................336
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ....... 336
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ................ 337
Service Contract .................337
WARRANTY INFORMATION .............. 337
MOPAR®PARTS ...................337
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............337
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .................337
In Canada ..................... 338
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............338
General Information .................. 338
7
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Wagoneer/Grand Wagoneer. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
The Wagoneer/Grand Wagoneer is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this
vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you drive this vehicle,
read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your
vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the
vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate
this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision
page 176.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of
the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the
instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you
should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information,
which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your
vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
8
KNOW & GO
Augmented Reality
See your vehicle like never before. Move your smartphone around your vehicle to dis-
cover and identify features, and to reveal information about how to use them to
enhance your ownership and driving experiences.
Use this QR code to access your digital experience.
Features Library
Want to learn about your vehicle’s features anytime, anywhere? Look
them up in the Features Library to access the same information that
you would get via augmented reality – including how-to videos and
feature-specific Owner’s Manual pages – when you are not at your
vehicle.
Explore The Exciting New Features Of Your Wagoneer Or Grand Wagoneer With The Know & Go App
Scan me
INTRODUCTION 9
1
Push Notifications
Do not miss out on all your vehicle has to offer. Enable push notifications, on your
smartphone, to get alerts about features and capabilities you have not explored on the
app yet.
*Available for US Residents only
SYMBOLS KEY
WARNING! These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a colli-
sion, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION! These statements are against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your
vehicle.
NOTE: A suggestion which will improve installa-
tion, operation, and reliability. If not fol-
lowed, may result in damage.
TIP: General ideas/solutions/suggestions on
easier use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional infor-
mation on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many pas-
senger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applica-
tions. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control, it may roll over while some other
vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that
can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe
or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-
nificantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
Rollover Warning Label
10 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthi-
ness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when oper-
ating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
page 100.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
page 100
Brake Warning Light
page 101
Battery Charge Warning Light
page 101
Red Warning Lights
Door Open Warning Light
page 101
Drowsy Driver Detected Warning Light
page 101
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
page 101
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
page 102
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
page 102
Hood Open Warning Light
page 102
INTRODUCTION 11
1
Red Warning Lights
Liftgate Open Warning Light
page 102
Night Vision Animal Detected Warning Light
page 102
Night Vision Pedestrian Detected Warning Light
page 102
Oil Pressure Warning Light
page 102
Oil Temperature Warning Light
page 102
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
page 102
Red Warning Lights
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
page 103
Vehicle Security Warning Light
page 103
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
page 103
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
page 103
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
page 103
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
page 103
12 INTRODUCTION
Yellow Warning Lights
Service Active Lane Management Warning Light
page 103
Active Lane Management Warning Light
page 104
Low Fuel Warning Light
page 104
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
page 104
Night Vision Animal Detected Warning Light
page 104
Night Vision Pedestrian Detected Warning Light
page 104
Yellow Warning Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
page 104
Oil Level Sensor Fault Warning Light
page 104
Service 4WD Warning Light
page 104
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light
page 105
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) /
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) Light
page 105
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
page 105
INTRODUCTION 13
1
Yellow Warning Lights
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
page 105
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light
page 105
Drowsiness Detected System Fault Warning Light
page 106
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light
page 103
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Low Indicator Light
page 106
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light
page 106
Yellow Indicator Lights
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator Light
page 106
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light
page 106
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light
page 106
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light
page 106
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light
page 106
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) /
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) Off Indicator Light
page 106
14 INTRODUCTION
Yellow Indicator Lights
NEUTRAL Indicator Light
page 106
Maximum Payload Exceeded Indicator Light
page 106
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
page 106
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Indicator Light
page 107
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator
Light
page 107
Auto HOLD Indicator Light
page 107
Green Indicator Lights
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
page 107
Front Fog Indicator Light
page 107
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
page 107
Night Vision Active Indicator Light
page 107
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light
page 107
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
page 107
Sport Mode Indicator Light
page 107
INTRODUCTION 15
1
Green Indicator Lights
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
page 107
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
page 107
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light
page 108
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
page 108
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
page 108
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
page 108
White Indicator Lights
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light
page 108
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light
page 108
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light
page 108
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
page 108
Gray Indicator Lights
Night Vision Suppressed Indicator Light
page 108
16 INTRODUCTION
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™, Remote Air Suspension Lowering, and
Remote Start. The key fob allows you to lock or unlock
all doors, liftgate, and fuel door, as well as activate the
Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft
(20 m). The key fob does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system. The key fob also con-
tains an emergency key, which is stored in the rear of
the key fob.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the key fob will
operate at distances up to 328 ft (100 m).
NOTE:
•
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the
key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or
other electronic device. This may result in poor
performance.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless Charging
Pad, the key fob may not be detected if it is placed
within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad
page 76.
•
With the ignition in the ON position and the vehicle
moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are
disabled.
In case the ignition switch does not change positions
with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be veri-
fied by referring to the instrument cluster, which will
display directions to follow.
For more information on ignition positions, see
page 20.
NOTE:
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by a
message in the instrument cluster display, or by the
LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no lon-
ger illuminates after a key fob button is pushed, then
the key fob battery requires replacement
page 338.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five seconds to
unlock all the doors, liftgate, and fuel door. To lock all the
doors, liftgate, and fuel door, push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
and the illuminated entry system will be activated.
When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash
and the horn will chirp.
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle is equipped with the Auto Relock fea-
ture, and is unlocked with the key fob, and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock
and the Vehicle Security system will arm
(if equipped). This feature can be enabled/disabled
within Uconnect Settings.
•
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock
again automatically if the key fob is left inside the
passenger compartment, otherwise the doors will
stay locked.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button through Uconnect Settings
page 179.
Key Fob
1 — LED Indicator
2 — Unlock
3 — Remote Start
4 — Air Suspension Remote Lowering (If Equipped)
5 — Lock
6 — Power Liftgate
7—Panic
8 — Emergency Key
17
2
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and
visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along
with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
•
The doors have to be open and then closed in order
for the vehicle to check for the presence of a key
fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not activate
until all of the doors are closed.
•
These alerts will not be activated in situations where
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
inside.
Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of
The Vehicle) — If Equipped
For easy entry and loading, your vehicle can
be lowered to Entry/Exit height by pushing
the key fob air suspension button two times.
When air suspension lowering is requested
using the key fob, the vehicle will send a series of
chirps and flashes (when enabled within Uconnect Set-
tings) to alert the customer that the operation has
begun and will continue these alerts until it success-
fully lowers.
The following conditions must be met for the vehicle to
lower remotely:
•
The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit (Park)
ride height.
•
The vehicle battery must be fully charged.
•
All doors must be closed.
•
The key fob must be out of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Ensure the vehicle is clear of all objects, pets, and
people prior to remote lowering.
Canceling Remote Lowering
Vehicle lowering can be canceled at anytime. When
vehicle lowering is canceled, the vehicle will raise up to
the next defined level and lock out the remote lowering
feature for five seconds before a new request can be
made.
To cancel vehicle lowering, push the key fob air suspen-
sion button one time during the lowering process. When
vehicle lowering is canceled, the horn will chirp two
times and the turn signal lamps will flash four times.
Once raising is completed, the horn will chirp one time.
NOTE:
For more information on Air Suspension, see
page 121.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery model is one CR2450 battery.
NOTE:
•
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin
battery dimensions.
•
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
•
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the
back housing or the printed circuit board.
•
Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on the key
fob above the top row buttons blinks when a button
is pressed. The coin battery should last a minimum
of three years with normal vehicle usage.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the emer-
gency key release button (1) on the side of the key
fob, and pulling the emergency key (2) out with your
other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing down,
and locate the small rectangular gap on the left side
between the housing and the back cover of the key
fob. Use a small flat-bladed tool to pry open the left
side of the fob cover while applying pressure until
the cover snaps open.
3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the key fob,
which is positioned farther to the edge than the left
side gap. Pry open the right side, and remove the
back cover.
4. Remove the battery by using your thumb to slide the
battery downward and back toward the key ring.
NOTE:
You can also insert a screwdriver or similar tool into
the battery removal pocket to pry the battery out.
NOTE:
When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign on
the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause bat-
tery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to push
down and slide the battery under the small lip on
the top edge of the opening.
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top edge
of the back cover with the top of the fob, and press
the edges into the interlocking hinges until all edges
snap together with no large visual gaps.
7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks into place.
NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by qualified
technicians. If the battery requires replacement, see an
authorized dealer.
Emergency Key Removed
Pry Apart Key Fob Halves
Key Fob Battery Location
Battery Removal Pocket
Key Fob Battery Replacement
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
WARNING!
•
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
•
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
•
Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close
securely, stop using the product and keep it away
from children.
Programming And Requesting
Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
•
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
•
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
•
Always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system ser-
viced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The sys-
tem does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is
locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unau-
thorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that
are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb
check, it indicates that there is a problem with the elec-
tronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone attempted to
start the engine with an invalid key fob. In the event
that a valid key fob is used to start the engine but there
is an issue with the vehicle electronics, the engine will
start and shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the elec-
tronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as
soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use
of these systems may result in vehicle starting prob-
lems and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
page 338.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob
is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in posi-
tion. These modes are OFF, ON/RUN, and START.
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
•
The engine is stopped
•
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm,
etc.) are still available
ON/RUN
•
Driving position
•
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate con-
trols, heated seats, etc.)
START
•
The engine will start (when foot is on the brake pedal)
NOTE:
•
If the ignition position does not change with a push
of the ignition button, and the instrument cluster
displays a message such as “Key Fob Not
Detected”, the key fob may have a low or depleted
battery. In this situation, a backup method can be
used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side of the key fob (side opposite of the emergency
key) against the START/STOP ignition button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
•
Replacement of the key fob battery is recommended.
WARNING!
•
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
•
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Key-
less Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless sig-
nal and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system
from starting the vehicle.
•
For more information on the engine starting proce-
dure, see
page 110.
•
When opening the driver's door and the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position (engine not running), a chime
will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the
OFF position. In addition to the chime, the message
“Ignition ON” will display in the cluster.
START/STOP Ignition Button
1 — OFF
2 — ON/RUN
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
REMOTE START
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system has
a range of approximately 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambi-
ent conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range
page 338.
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp
twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
15 minute cycle. Pushing the Remote Start button a
third time shuts the engine off.
NOTE:
•
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
•
Remote Start can only be used twice.
•
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
•
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
Headlight animation (if equipped) will occur when
Remote Start is activated, if “Headlight Illumination
On Approach” is enabled within Uconnect Settings.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
•
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated
for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Gear selector in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Liftgate closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
System not disabled from previous Remote Start
event
•
Vehicle Security Light flashing
•
Ignition in OFF position
•
Panic button is not pushed
•
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
•
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
•
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start sys-
tem, either push and release the unlock button on the key
fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using Key-
less Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry via the door handles,
and disarm the Vehicle Security system (if equipped).
Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and
release the START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or
if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute
cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the climate controls will resume previously set
operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
•
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
•
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
— Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instru-
ment cluster display until you push the START/STOP
ignition button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less.
The time is dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
the timer expires, the system will automatically adjust the
settings depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next section
for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT
SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost
will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat feature will turn on
if selected in the Comfort menu within Uconnect Settings
page 179
. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when Remote Start is
activated, if programmed in the Comfort menu. The
vehicle will adjust the climate control settings depend-
ing on the outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will automatically adjust to the
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on
the outside ambient temperature. This will occur until
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
For more information on ATC and climate control set-
tings, see
page 61.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position. The climate control setting will change, and
exit automatic operation, if manually adjusted by the
driver while the vehicle is in Remote Start mode. This
includes the OFF button on the climate controls, which
will turn the system off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD
WIPER DE-ICER ACTIVATION —
IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will continue.
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
Remote Start prematurely:
•
Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
•
Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
•
Remote Start Canceled — Liftgate Open
•
Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
•
Remote Start Canceled — System Fault
•
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active
until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition for
unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security sys-
tem is armed, interior switches for door locks and lift-
gate release handle are disabled. If something triggers
the alarm, the Vehicle Security system will provide the
following audible and visible signals:
•
The horn will pulse
•
The turn signals will flash
•
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
○
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make
sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
○
Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
○
Touch the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob available in
the same exterior zone
page 27.
○
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the Vehicle
Security Light (located in the lower right portion of the
instrument cluster display) will begin to flash every two
seconds until it is disarmed.
NOTE:
If the system is armed by pushing the lock button on
the interior door panel, the Vehicle Security Light will
flash rapidly for about 15 seconds once the door is
closed, then slow down to every two seconds.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
•
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
•
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the
door
page 27.
•
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm
the system.
NOTE:
•
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm
the Vehicle Security system. Use of the door key cyl-
inder when the alarm is armed will sound the alarm
when the door is opened.
•
The Vehicle Security system remains armed when
the power liftgate is opened using the liftgate button
on the key fob. If someone enters the vehicle
through the opened liftgate, then opens any door
from the inside, the alarm will sound.
•
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock the
liftgate, the Vehicle Security system is disarmed and
the rest of the vehicle doors will remain locked
unless all doors are set to unlock on first press
within Uconnect Settings.
•
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the inte-
rior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken
to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the
horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds
between cycles and up to eight cycles if the trigger
remains active) and then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL
OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock, or an emergency
lock lever
page 25.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security system
in your absence, the horn will sound three times and
the exterior lights will blink three times when you dis-
arm the Vehicle Security system.
DELUXE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Deluxe Vehicle Security system monitors the doors,
hood latch, and liftgate for unauthorized entry and the
ignition switch for unauthorized operation. The system
also includes a dual function intrusion sensor and
vehicle tilt sensor. The intrusion sensor monitors the
vehicle interior for motion. The vehicle tilt sensor moni-
tors the vehicle for any tilting actions (tow away, tire
removal, ferry transport, etc.).
If a perimeter violation triggers the security system, the
horn will sound for 29 seconds and the exterior lights
will flash followed by approximately five seconds of no
activity. This will continue for eight cycles if no action is
taken to disarm the system.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
○
Push the lock button on the interior power door
lock switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
○
Touch the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a key fob available in the
same exterior zone
page 27.
○
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
When armed, the interior motion sensor detects
movement within the vehicle's interior, including
moving objects (i.e. people and pets) and air cur-
rents through open windows or the sunroof. The
windows and sunroof should be closed, and moving
objects should not be left in the vehicle when the
intrusion detection is armed, otherwise false alarms
can occur.
•
Once the security system is armed, it remains in
that state until you disarm it by following either of
the disarming procedures described. If a power loss
occurs after arming the system, you must disarm
the system after restoring power to prevent alarm
activation.
•
The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector)
actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm
the Vehicle Security system. If you prefer, you can
turn off the ultrasonic intrusion sensor when arming
the Vehicle Security system. To do so, push the lock
button on the key fob three times within 15 seconds
of arming the system (while the Vehicle Security
Light is flashing rapidly). The vehicle will remain
locked but disable the alarm in the case of repeated
false alarms due to ambient conditions.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
•
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
•
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the
door
page 27.
•
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF posi-
tion by pushing the START/STOP ignition button
(requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
•
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
•
The Vehicle Security system remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security system. If someone
enters the vehicle through the opened liftgate, then
opens any door, the alarm will sound.
•
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the inte-
rior power door lock switches will not unlock the
doors.
•
The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector)
actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm
the Vehicle Security system. If you prefer, you can
turn off the ultrasonic intrusion sensor when arming
the security system. To do so, push the lock button
on the key fob four times within 15 seconds of arm-
ing the system (while the Vehicle Security Light is
flashing rapidly).
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL
OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock, or an emergency
lock lever
page 25.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The front doors can be manually unlocked with a single
pull of the inside door handle. The driver’s door can
also be manually locked/unlocked by inserting the
emergency key into the lock cylinder on the outside
door handle.
The rear doors can be manually unlocked with a double
pull of the inside door handle.
Driver’s Door Cylinder Lock
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
All doors except the driver’s door can be manually
locked by inserting the emergency key into the emer-
gency lock lever and sliding the lever upward. The emer-
gency lock lever is located on the door latch face of
each door.
NOTE:
•
The emergency lock lever is only accessible when
the door is open.
•
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the Vehicle
Security system.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock buttons are located on each front
door panel. Use these buttons to lock or unlock all
doors, liftgate, and fuel door.
When the doors are locked, an indicator light in the lock
button will illuminate.
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the key fob
is detected inside the vehicle when the door lock button
on the front door panel is used to lock the door, then
the door is closed. The horn will also chirp to alert the
driver. This will occur for two attempts. On the third
attempt, the doors will lock even if the key fob is inside.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop,
or other electronic device, the wireless signal may get
blocked, and the driver’s door may not unlock
automatically.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in
ON/RUN and the driver's door is open, the doors will
not lock.
Rear Passenger Power Door Locks
Power door lock buttons are located on each rear door
trim panel. Push the lock button to lock the rear door or
push the unlock button to unlock the rear door.
POWER SIDE STEPS — IF EQUIPPED
The Power Side Steps will extend for easier entry and
exit of the vehicle.
When configured for “Auto” mode, the Power Side Steps
will deploy when any of the doors are opened, and they
will retract when the doors are closed. This mode can be
turned on or off in the Uconnect Settings
page 179
.
NOTE:
•
When enabled within Uconnect Settings, the Power
Side Steps can also be manually extended or
retracted by pressing the Power Side Step button on
the Controls menu of the Vehicle screen.
•
If the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), the
steps will retract.
Emergency Lock Lever
Power Door Lock Switches
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ —
PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having
to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
If equipped, the rear doors will also have Passive Entry
capabilities.
NOTE:
•
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through
Uconnect Settings
page 179.
•
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Pas-
sive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob's wireless signal and
prevent the Passive Entry handle from locking/
unlocking the vehicle.
•
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach
(low beams, license plate lamp, parking lights, door
handle pocket lights [if equipped]) for whichever
duration is set between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds.
Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two flashes of the
turn signal lights.
•
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/snowing
on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock and
lock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
•
The doors may lock and unlock when water is
sprayed on the Passive Entry door handles, if the
key fob is located outside of the vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle.
•
Passive Entry lock initiates one horn chirp and one
flash of turn signal lights. These settings can be pro-
grammed on/off within Uconnect Settings
page 179.
•
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and will arm the Vehicle Security system
(if equipped).
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle.
Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver
door automatically. Grabbing the front passenger door
handle (or a rear handle when equipped with four-door
Passive Entry) will unlock all doors and the liftgate
automatically.
NOTE:
•
Either the driver’s door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
page 179.
•
All doors will unlock when the front passenger (or a
rear door when equipped with four door Passive
Entry) door handle is grabbed regardless of the driv-
er’s door unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
•
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key
fob while a door is open.
•
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
•
A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
•
When the Vehicle Security system is in pre-arm or
armed status and the liftgate transitions from
opened to closed.
•
When the liftgate transitions from open to closed
and Remote Start is active.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle, the
vehicle will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Pas-
sive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The
vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the follow-
ing conditions are true:
•
The doors are manually locked using the emergency
lock lever.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
•
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then the doors are closed.
•
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door
handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door handle, touch the lock icon
on the door handle to lock all four doors and liftgate.
NOTE:
Do NOT grab the door handle when touching the lock
icon. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
•
After touching the door handle lock icon, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the
doors using any Passive Entry door handle. This is
done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle
unlocking.
•
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect Set-
tings, the key protection described in "Frequency
Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)"
remains active/functional.
•
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key
fob battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release button. With a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate release handle for a power open on
vehicles equipped with Power Liftgate. Push the elec-
tronic liftgate button and lift for Manual Liftgate
vehicles.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located
on the outside liftgate door handle.
NOTE:
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all doors
and the liftgate
page 338.
Touch The Door Handle Lock Icon To Lock
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
Electronic Liftgate Handle
1 — Lock Button Location
2 — Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON
EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks after the following sequence of
actions:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled within Uconnect Settings
page 179.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed in
PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
IF EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
The auto door lock feature is enabled or disabled by an
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
SYSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat-head
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to
the lock or unlock position. When the system on a door
is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in
the unlocked position.
NOTE:
•
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door
lock is in the unlocked position.
•
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the unlocked position.
•
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the locked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside with the Child-Protection locks
engaged (locked).
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with the
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors
from inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the
vehicle, be sure to check that there is no one left
inside.
STEERING WHEEL
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING
STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column control is located below the multifunc-
tion lever on the steering column.
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering column.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings, you
can use your key fob or the memory switch on the driv-
er's door trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering
column to saved positions
page 30.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL
The steering wheel contains a heating ele-
ment that helps warm your hands in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has
three temperature settings. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may
not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located on the
left side of the radio screen or within the Uconnect sys-
tem. You can gain access to the control button on the top
left side of the screen by tapping the temperature con-
trols, which will provide a quick drop-down menu contain-
ing the controls, or through the controls screen of the
touchscreen. If your vehicle is not equipped with the but-
ton on the side of the radio, you can also access the con-
trol button through the climate screen.
•
Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the HI setting on.
•
Press the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the MED setting on.
•
Press the heated steering wheel button a third time
to turn the LO setting on.
•
Press the heated steering wheel button a fourth
time to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 23.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exer-
cise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, espe-
cially if used for long periods.
•
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steer-
ing wheel covers of any type and material. This
may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER MEMORY
SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver, and if equipped, also the
front passenger to save up to two different memory
profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile saves desired position settings for
the following features:
Driver’s Side
•
Seat position
•
Easy entry/exit seat (if equipped)
•
Side mirrors
•
Power tilt and telescopic steering column
(if equipped)
•
Power adjustable pedals (if equipped)
•
A set of desired radio station presets
Passenger’s Side (If Equipped)
•
Seat position
The memory settings switches are located on the front
door panels, next to the door handle, and consists of
two or three buttons, depending on trim level:
•
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles
•
The set (S) button (Wagoneer models only), which is
used to activate the memory save function
Wagoneer Memory Settings Buttons
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can be
linked to either driver’s side memory position 1 or 2.
•
Front passenger memory settings cannot be linked
toakeyfob.
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY
FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected
profile from memory.
Wagoneer
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2.
Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic
steering column [if equipped], and radio station
presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster
display will indicate which memory position has
been set.
Grand Wagoneer
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and tele-
scopic steering column [if equipped], and radio sta-
tion presets).
3. Press memory button (1) or (2) for two or more sec-
onds. The instrument cluster display will indicate
which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be below 5 mph (8 km/h) to recall
a memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY
FOB TO MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
saved driver’s side memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must select the
“Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature through
the Uconnect Settings
page 179.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
Wagoneer
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select a desired driver’s side memory profile, 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or
(2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will
display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked from your driver’s side
memory settings by pushing the set (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, pushing the unlock button on the
key fob.
Grand Wagoneer
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Recall the desired memory profile (1 or 2).
3. Press the memory button (1) or (2) (according to the
previous selection) for two seconds or more, and
release.
4. Push and hold the lock button on the key fob within
10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked from your driver’s side
memory settings by pushing the memory button (1) or
(2) for two seconds or more and releasing, and then
within 10 seconds, pushing and holding the unlock but-
ton on the key fob.
Grand Wagoneer Memory Settings Buttons
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
Memory Recall is available when not in PARK, if the
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
•
To recall a memory settings using the memory
switches, push memory button (1) or (2) on the
memory switch.
•
To recall the driver’s side memory settings using the
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob
linked to memory position 1 or 2.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons during a recall, or by pushing any of the seat
adjustment switches. When a recall is canceled, the
seat and power tilt/telescopic steering column will stop
moving. A delay of one second will occur before another
recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR
SEATS)
WARNING!
Do not place luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by sim-
ply unfolding the seats to the open position, over time
the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT FORWARD/
REARWARD ADJUSTMENT
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of the
seat near the floor and release it when the seat is at
the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT RECLINE
ADJUSTMENT
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever located
on the outboard side of the seat. Then, push the seat rear-
ward to the desired position and release the lever. To
return the seatback to its normal position, lean forward
and lift the lever. To ensure the seatback is latched, use
body pressure to lean forward and rearward.
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
Rear Seat Recline Lever
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To recline the center seat, pull the recline strap located
on the seatback, and move forward or backward as
desired. Release the strap when the desired seat posi-
tion has been reached.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
SECOND ROW BENCH FOLD FLAT SEAT
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can
be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and
still maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
position the front seat to its mid-track position espe-
cially if the seat is equipped with Rear Seat Entertain-
ment. Also, be sure that the front seats are fully upright
and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to
fold down easily.
To lower the seatback, pull upward on the recline lever
located on the outboard side of the seat, and let the
seatback fold forward automatically.
To lower the center seatback, pull the recline strap,
located on the left side of the seatback, and let the
seatback fold forward automatically.
To raise the seatback, fold the seatback up into its origi-
nal position and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Center Seat Recline Strap
Second Row Bench Seat Folded Flat
Center Seat Recline Strap
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT EASY ACCESS
FOR THIRD ROW
The second row bench seats can slide forward to allow
passengers to easily access the third row seats.
Press the easy entry button located on the outboard
side of the seatback. Once pressed, the seat will pitch
forward, allowing the seat to slide forward.
To return the seat to a sitting position, push the seat-
back rearward until the seat locks.
Emergency Straps
In the event that the vehicle loses power, the Easy Entry
buttons will not function. There are emergency straps
located on the back of the second row outboard seats
to allow the third row occupants to manually fold the
seats flat to exit the vehicle.
Pull the emergency straps to fold the second row seat
flat.
Second Row Captain’s Chairs —
If Equipped
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS
FORWARD/REARWARD ADJUSTMENT
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of the
seat near the floor and release it when the seat is at
the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
Bench Seat Easy Entry Button
Emergency Straps
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS RECLINE
ADJUSTMENT
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever located
on the outboard side of the seat. Then, push the seat
rearward to the desired position and release the lever.
To return the seatback to its normal position, lean for-
ward and lift the lever. To ensure the seatback is
latched, use body pressure to lean forward and
rearward.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS FOLD FLAT
SEATS
The second row seatbacks can be folded flat to carry
cargo.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
position the front seat to its mid-track position espe-
cially if the seat is equipped with Rear Seat Entertain-
ment. Also, be sure that the front seats are fully upright
and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to
fold down easily.
Pull upward on the recline lever located on the out-
board side of each second row seat, and let the seat-
back fold forward automatically.
To Raise The Rear Seats
Fold the seatbacks upward to their original position,
and lock them into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIR EASY
ACCESS FOR THIRD ROW
The second row captain’s chairs can slide forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
Press the easy entry button located on the outboard
side of the seatback. Once pressed, the entire seat will
pitch forward, allowing the seat to slide forward.
To return the seat to a sitting position, push the seat-
back rearward until the seat locks.
Rear Seat Recline Lever
Second Row Captain’s Chair Folded Flat
Captain’s Chair Easy Entry Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
Emergency Straps
In the event that the vehicle loses power, the Easy Entry
buttons will not function. There are emergency straps
located on the back of the second row outboard seats
to allow the third row occupants to manually fold the
seats flat to exit the vehicle.
Pull the emergency straps to fold the second row seat
flat.
Manual Folding Third Row — If Equipped
Both third row seats can be folded flat to increase the
cargo area. To lower either seat, pull on the release
straps located on both sides of the rear cargo area,
near the bottom of the seat.
NOTE:
The second row seats must be in their full upright posi-
tion or folded flat when folding the third row seats.
To raise the seat, pull the seatback up and push back
to lock it into place. You can also use the return straps
in the rear cargo area, on the back of the seat.
To recline the seat, pull the recline straps, located on
the sides of the seat.
Emergency Straps
Release Straps
Third Row Folded
Return Straps
Recline Straps
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
POWER ADJUSTMENT
(FRONT SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
Wagoneer models will be equipped with 8-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat.
There are two switches that control the movement of
the seat cushion and the seatback.
Grand Wagoneer models will be equipped with 20-way
power driver and front passenger seats. The power seat
switches are located on the driver and front passenger
door panels near the door handles. These switches con-
trol the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or
Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the rear of seat
switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
of the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback recline switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired position is
reached.
For Grand Wagoneer models, the angle of the upper
seatback can also be adjusted forward or rearward.
Push the upper seatback switch forward or rearward,
and the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position is
reached.
Wagoneer Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
Grand Wagoneer Power Seat Switches
1 — Front Headrest Adjustment Switch
2 — Power Massage Switch
3 — Decrease Back/Thigh Bolster & Lumbar Switch
4 — Increase Back/Thigh Bolster & Lumbar Switch
5 — Upper Seatback Switch
6 — Seatback Recline Switch
7 — Seat Switch (Multiple Functions)
8 — Cushion Extender Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's
path.
Power Seat Bolster Adjustment —
If Equipped
In Grand Wagoneer models, the front driver and pas-
senger seatback and seat cushion bolsters can be
extended outward, or retracted inward by using the (+)
and (–) adjustment switches on the door panel. The
bolsters can also be adjusted directly in the Front Com-
fort And Convenience Display or the Uconnect display.
Push the (+) switch to extend the bolsters, or push the
(–) switch to retract the bolsters.
When either the (+) or the (–) switch is pushed, the
Front Comfort And Convenience Display
page 62
will change to the Seat menu. The last selected seat
item of lumbar in/out, lumbar up/down, back bolster, or
thigh bolster will be retained. Select the desired adjust-
ment type, and then press the (+) or (–) switch to
adjust.
NOTE:
If the Front Comfort And Convenience Display is in the
stowed position, the Seat menu will appear in the main
Uconnect display.
Cushion Extender — If Equipped
In Grand Wagoneer models, the cushion can be
extended forward a couple inches (centimeters) to
increase thigh support. Push the cushion extender
switch forward or rearward to extend or retract the
cushion. Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
The front driver and passenger seats may be equipped
with power lumbar adjustment.
The Wagoneer power lumbar switch is located on the
outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch for-
ward to increase the lumbar support. Push the switch
rearward to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing
upward or downward on the switch will raise and lower
the position of the support.
The Grand Wagoneer power lumbar adjustment
switches are located on the door trim. The (+) and (–)
switches can be used to adjust lumbar support in/out
and up/down. The power lumbar can also be adjusted
directly in the Front Comfort And Convenience Display
or the Uconnect display.
Seat Bolster Adjustment Switches
Wagoneer Power Lumbar Adjustment Switch
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When either the (+) or the (–) switch is pushed, the
Front Comfort And Convenience Display
page 62
will change to the Seat menu. The last selected seat
item of lumbar in/out, lumbar up/down, back bolster, or
thigh bolster will be retained. Select the desired adjust-
ment type, and then press the (+) or (–) switch to
adjust.
NOTE:
If the Front Comfort And Convenience Display is in the
stowed position, the Seat menu will display on the main
Uconnect screen.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning
to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting
the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you place the
vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
•
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
(6 cm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater
than or equal to 2.7 inches (7 cm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the vehicle’s ignition in the
ON/RUN position.
•
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when
the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch
(2.3 cm) forward of the rear stop. At this position,
there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat
for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and
Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory setting
profile
page 30.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the
vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/
Exit feature is enabled or disabled through the program-
mable features in the Uconnect system
page 179.
POWER ADJUSTMENT
(REAR SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat
belt.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
•
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the
third row stow clip when using the seat belt to
restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be posi-
tioned properly on the occupant and they could be
more seriously injured in an accident as a result.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.
Grand Wagoneer Power Lumbar Adjustment Switches
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
If equipped, the power recline switch for the third row
seats is located on the trim panel next to the seat. This
switch adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward for
occupant comfort.
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push and hold the forward or rearward but-
ton. The seat will move in the direction of the button
push. Release the button when the desired position is
released.
Rear Seat Power Folding Seatbacks —
If Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
right rear trim panel inside the cargo area, as part of a
switch bank.
The switch bank allows multiple power folding positions
for the second and third row seats.
The second row seats can be folded using these
switches, while the third row can be folded or unfolded.
NOTE:
The third row seat belts may interfere with the power
folding of the seat. Place the seat belt webbing behind
the stow clip before stowing or opening the seat. When
the seat is in the desired position, remove the webbing
from the stow clip so that it is ready for use. Never leave
the seat belt in the stow clip when it is used to restrain
an occupant.
NOTE:
•
The head restraints will lower automatically as nec-
essary when the power seat begins to move
page 42.
•
The head restraint can also be lowered manually
using the pull strap located at the back of the seat.
There are also power folding switches for the third row
seats located on the C-pillar (just behind the rear doors
on the trim panels).
POWER SEAT MASSAGE —
IF EQUIPPED
In Grand Wagoneer models, the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s seats may be equipped with power massage.
The seat massage feature can be turned on/off through
the massage button located on the door panel near the
handle, or through the Controls menu on the radio
screen.
Third Row Power Recline Switch
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
1 — Second Row Left Side Fold
2 — Second Row Right Side Fold
3 — Third Row Left Side Fold/Unfold
4 — Third Row Right Side Fold/Unfold
C-Pillar Power Folding Switches (Left Side Shown)
1 — Third Row Left Side Fold/Unfold
2 — Third Row Right Side Fold/Unfold
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Once activated by either method, the massage controls
screen will display on the Front Comfort And Conve-
nience Display
page 62, or on the standard
Uconnect display if the Front Comfort And Convenience
Display is stowed. “Massage Type” and “Intensity Level”
can be selected for the activated seat.
There are four intensity levels and five massage types
that can be selected.
Intensity Levels:
•
High
•
Med
•
Low
•
Off
Massage Types:
•
Waterfall
•
Lower Back
•
Extend
•
Low Extend
•
Rock Climb
The massage type and intensity level status will be syn-
chronized between the main Uconnect display and the
Front Comfort and Convenience Display.
The selected settings will save in the system’s memory
when turned off, and will resume the next time the sys-
tem is turned on.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles equipped with a selectable back/
cushion feature for massage seats, the massage
feature can be deselected for either the seatback or
seat cushion. If both options are deselected, mas-
sage will turn off.
•
The engine must be running for the power seatback
massage to operate.
•
The massage feature will turn off after 20 minutes
of use. However, if the massage type or intensity
level is changed, the timer then resets.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical condition must exer-
cise care when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time.
•
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cush-
ion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could
cause serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are
located on the sides of the radio or within
the Uconnect system. You can access the
controls through the Climate screen.
•
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
the MED setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
LO setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a fourth time to turn
the heating elements off.
The heating elements can be turned on in the seatback
only, seat cushion only, or both. Press the seat image
on the touchscreen or push the seat zone button on the
side of the radio to cycle through these seat zones. An
LED will illuminate next to the selected zone(s).
If equipped with touchscreen buttons, the selected
zones will be highlighted on the seat image.
NOTE:
•
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
•
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Door Panel Massage Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
•
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 23.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
The two second row outboard seats may be
equipped with heated seats. There are two
heated seat switches that allow the rear pas-
sengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches for each heater are located
on the rear of the center console.
If equipped with a Rear Comfort And Convenience Dis-
play, heated seat settings can be selected within the
display
page 66.
You can choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF heat settings.
Indicator lights in each switch illuminate indicating the
level of heat in use.
•
Push the heated seat switch once to turn the HI set-
ting on.
•
Push the heated seat switch a second time to turn
the MED setting on.
•
Push the heated seat switch a third time to turn the
LO setting on.
•
Push the heated seat switch a fourth time to turn
the heating elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the seat cushion and seatback are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and
move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to
help keep the occupant cooler in higher ambient
temperatures.
Front Ventilated Seats
The ventilated seats control buttons are
located on the sides of the radio or within
the Uconnect system. The fans operate at
three speeds: HI, MED and LO.
•
Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
•
Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose MED.
•
Press the ventilated seat button a third time to
choose LO.
•
Press the ventilated seat button a fourth time to
turn the ventilation off.
The fans can be turned on in the seatback only, seat
cushion only, or both. Press the seat image on the
touchscreen or push the seat zone button on the side
of the radio to cycle through these seat zones. An LED
will illuminate next to the selected zone(s). If equipped
with touchscreen buttons, the selected zones will be
highlighted on the seat image.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 23.
Rear Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
The two second row outboard seats may be
equipped with ventilated seats. The rear ven-
tilated seat control switches are located on
the rear of the center console and allow the
rear passengers to operate the seats independently.
If equipped with a Rear Comfort And Convenience Dis-
play, ventilated seat settings can be selected within the
display
page 66.
You can choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF fan speed.
Indicator lights in each switch illuminate indicating the
level of fan speed in use.
•
Push the ventilated seat switch once to choose HI.
•
Push the ventilated seat switch a second time to
choose MED.
•
Push the ventilated seat switch a third time to
choose LO.
•
Push the ventilated seat switch a fourth time to turn
the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
•
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front four-way driver and
passenger head restraints.
The Wagoneer is equipped with manual four-way head
restraints, and the Grand Wagoneer is equipped with
power four-way head restraints with adjustable wings.
If your vehicle is equipped with manual front head
restraints, to raise the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located on the left side of the head
restraint, and pull upward on the head restraint. To
lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button,
and push downward on the head restraint.
To adjust the head restraint forward, press the adjust-
ment button on the left side of the head restraint, and
pull the top of the head restraint toward the front of the
vehicle as desired and release. To adjust the head
restraint rearward, press the adjustment button, and
push the top of the head restraint toward the rear of
the vehicle as desired and release.
If your vehicle is equipped with power front head
restraints, push upward or push downward on the head
restraint adjustment switch, located on the door trim
panel, to raise or lower the head restraint. The head
restraint will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Wagoneer Head Restraint Adjustment Button
Upright Position (Manual Head Restraint)
Upward Adjustment (Manual Head Restraint)
Grand Wagoneer Head Restraint Adjustment Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
The head restraint can also be adjusted both forward
and rearward. Push the head restraint switch forward or
rearward. The head restraint will move in the direction
of the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Grand Wagoneer front power head restraints are also
equipped with adjustable wings, located on the outer
left-hand and right-hand front face of the head
restraint.
To adjust the wings for additional comfort and support,
pull forward on the wings. To return the wings, push the
wings rearward to the flat position.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
•
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
•
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Upright Position (Power Head Restraint)
Forward Adjustment (Power Head Restraint)
Adjustable Wing (Left-Hand Side Shown)
Wing Adjustment
Wing Extended (Left-Hand Side Shown)
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints — Second Row
Captain’s Chairs
If the second row is equipped with captain’s chairs, the
head restraints are not adjustable or removable. They
automatically fold forward when the seatback is folded,
and do not return to their normal position when the
seatback is raised. After returning the seatback to its
upright position after a folding operation, raise the
head restraint until it locks in place.
The driver can also fold the second row outboard head
restraints through the radio, for improved visibility when
the vehicle is in REVERSE and there are no occupants
in the seats.
Press the Headrest Fold button within the
Controls menu of the Uconnect system to
power fold the second row outboard head
restraints.
NOTE:
•
The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the second row.
•
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
second row seats.
WARNING!
•
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
If the second row is equipped with a bench seat, the
head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjust-
able or removable. They automatically fold forward
when the seatback is folded, and do not return to their
normal position when the seatback is raised. After
returning the seatback to its upright position after a
folding operation, raise the head restraint until it locks
in place.
The driver can also fold the second row outboard head
restraints through the radio, for improved visibility when
the vehicle is in REVERSE, and there are no occupants
in the seats.
Press the Headrest Fold button within the
Controls menu of the Uconnect system to
power fold the second row outboard head
restraints.
NOTE:
•
The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the second row.
•
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
second row seats.
The center head restraint has one adjustment position,
and can be adjusted up, when the seat is occupied, or
down for storage. To adjust this head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located on the base of the head
restraint, while pulling upward or pushing downward
until it locks into place.
NOTE:
The center head restraint is not removable.
NOTE:
For information on child restraint tethering, see
page 233.
WARNING!
•
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
(Continued)
Center Seat Head Restraint Adjustment Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
WARNING!
•
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Third Row Head Restraints
The head restraint in the center position can be raised
and lowered for tether routing or height adjustment
page 233.
NOTE:
The center head restraint should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If the
head restraint requires removal, see an authorized
dealer.
The third row outboard head restraints are not adjust-
able or removable, but can be folded for improved vis-
ibility when the vehicle is in REVERSE, and there are no
occupants in the seats.
Press the Headrest Fold button within the
Controls menu of the Uconnect system to
power fold the third row head restraints.
The head restraints will also automatically
fold when the seatbacks are folded forward using the
release handles on the backs of the seats from the
cargo area.
NOTE:
•
The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the third row.
•
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
third row seats.
WARNING!
•
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
•
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS — IF EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE
RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-
ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice
Recognition (VR) system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic voice commands can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
or say the vehicle’s Wake Up
word “Hey Uconnect”. The factory default Wake Up word
is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be reprogrammed
through the Uconnect Settings. After the beep, say:
•
“ Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
•
“ Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
•
“ Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
Center Head Restraint Adjustment Button
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system. You can also use the sys-
tem’s Wake Up word to activate voice recognition. The
Wake Up word can be set through the Uconnect Set-
tings
page 179.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
•
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passen-
ger conversations are examples of noise that may
impact recognition.
•
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead.
•
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button
or say the Wake Up word, wait until
after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
•
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
•
You can also interrupt the help message or system
prompts by speaking. This feature is called
“barge-in” and can be set through the Uconnect Set-
tings
page 179.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and
all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
page 338.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit
DriveUconnect.com (US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt
and seat position. This feature allows the brake and
accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the
driver to provide improved position with the steering
wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located on the instru-
ment panel, next to the headlight switch.
•
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition in the
OFF position.
•
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is
in REVERSE or when the Cruise Control system or
Adaptive Cruise Control system is on. If there is an
attempt to adjust the pedals when the system is
locked out, the following messages will appear:
○ Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control
Engaged
○ Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — For Vehicles Equipped With Navigation: Push The
Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Media, Navi-
gation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call, And Send
Or Receive A Text
1 — For Vehicles Not Equipped With Navigation: Push
The Phone Button To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — Push To Access The Tile Feature
3 — Push The Hang Up Button To End A Call Currently In
Progress
Adjustable Pedals Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
NOTE:
•
Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows
full movement of the pedal.
•
Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
•
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings
page 30, you can use your key fob or the
memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to
return the adjustable pedals to saved positions.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal's path.
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to
the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The
mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position
(small control forward toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s view.
You can turn the feature on or off through the Uconnect
system
page 179.
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high definition,
wide and unobstructed view of the road behind while
driving.
Position the mirror in the regular Automatic Dimming
Mirror mode, then activate the Digital Rearview Mirror
mode.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the on/off
control lever on the bottom of the mirror rearward
toward the driver.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Digital Rearview Mirror
1 — On/Off Control/Toggle
2 — Menu Button
3 — Left Scroll Button
4 — Right Scroll Button
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Push the menu button next to the on/off control/toggle
to access the following mirror options:
•
Brightness
•
Tilt
Use the left and right buttons to scroll through menu
options.
When not in use, push the on/off forward toward the
windshield to return the mirror to the regular Automatic
Dimming Mirror.
NOTE:
•
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective during
nighttime driving in low light applications due to low
ambient light levels. In the event that it provides the
user with less than expected vision, the mirror can
be reverted to a normal reflective Automatic Dim-
ming Mirror by pushing the control/toggle forward in
the vehicle and putting the mirror into Automatic
Dimming Mirror mode.
•
When the rear window washer is activated by push-
ing the windshield wiper/washer lever forward, the
ParkView Rear Back Up and Digital Rearview Mirror
(if equipped) cameras are also washed. For more
information, see
page 61.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.
Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod Feature —
If Equipped
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the
sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun
blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor blade can also be extended while the sun
visor is against the windshield for additional sun block-
age through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mir-
ror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a
slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the
size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
•
Full forward position
•
Full rearward position
•
Normal position
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING
MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The outside mirrors will automatically adjust for glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by
the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
CONVERSATION MIRROR
Located in the overhead console there is a conversation
mirror to view all of the passengers in the vehicle. Push
the panel to release the drop down mirror, raise it back
up to 3/4th of the way and let go; a latch will hold the
mirror in place. Raise the mirror all the way and push to
latch it back in the stowed position.
Lift Cover On Vanity Mirror
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
NOTE:
From the conversation mirror position, do not pull the
door fully open because it will damage the door. The
door must be put back in the closed position before
fully opening it.
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror control switch is located on the driv-
er's side door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, rotate the control switch to the
desired mirror: (L) or (R). Then push the switch in the
direction that you want the mirror to move.
NOTE:
Once adjustment is complete, rotate the knob to the
neutral position to prevent accidental movements.
Power Folding — If Equipped
To fold the door mirrors in using the Power Folding Mir-
ror function, rotate the control switch to the power fold-
ing position. Rotating the control to the left, right, or
neutral position will return the mirrors to the driving
position.
If the power mirror control switch is moved again during
door mirror folding (from closed to open position and
vice versa), the movement direction is reversed.
NOTE:
The Power Folding Mirror function is only available
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
•
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
•
The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded (by hand or by pushing the power folding
mirror switch).
•
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
•
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold
them by turning the switch (this may require multiple
switch activations to synchronize the driver and passen-
ger mirror). This resets them to their normal position.
Power mirror position can be saved as part of the Driver
Memory Settings (if equipped)
page 30.
AUTOMATIC POWER FOLDING
MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
When enabled within Uconnect Settings
page 179,
the exterior mirrors will automatically fold when the
vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position, and after
the doors are locked and closed.
Conversation Mirror
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Neutral Position
2—LeftMirror
3 — Control Switch
4 — Right Mirror
5 — Power Folding Position (If Equipped)
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The exterior mirrors will auto-fold in the following situa-
tions after the ignition is placed in the OFF position:
•
Pushing the lock button on the door panel before
the door is opened.
NOTE:
If the doors are already locked, push the lock button
again.
•
Opening the door, then pushing the lock button on
the door panel, followed by closing the door.
•
After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then push
the lock button on the key fob.
•
After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then touch
the lock icon on the Passive Entry door handle.
Automatic Unfolding
If the exterior mirrors were folded automatically, they
will unfold based on the selection with the Uconnect
system:
•
When the vehicle is unlocked using the key fob
•
When the vehicle is unlocked using a Passive Entry
door handle
•
When Proximity Wake-Up is activated page 56
•
When the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position
NOTE:
If the mirrors were folded manually by using the power
folding mirror switch on the driver’s door panel, they will
not automatically unfold.
HEATED MIRRORS
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster
(if equipped)
page 61.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will
move slightly downward from the present position when
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In
Reverse position.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned
on and off using the Uconnect system
page 179.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HomeLink®)
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
•
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door openers,
motorized gates, lighting or home
security systems. The HomeLink® unit
is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
•
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the three
different HomeLink® channels.
•
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with each
press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
•
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security sys-
tem is active
page 338.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmit-
ter of the device that is being programmed to the
HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held trans-
mitter is programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of
your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
Scan me
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
CHANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE
A ROLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING
CODE DEVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether the
device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device
with a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately visible when
looking at the device. The name and color of the button
may vary slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate
your garage door opener motor, refer to the following
steps:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this pro-
cedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® but-
ton you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage door
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indica-
tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code
final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code
final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can usu-
ally be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door
opener motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con-
firm that the garage door opener motor operates. If
the garage door opener motor does not operate,
repeat the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly, pro-
gramming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con-
firm that the garage door opener motor operates. If
the garage door opener motor does not operate,
repeat the steps from the beginning.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or
pets are in the path of the door or gate.
(Continued)
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or con-
fined area while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and
can cause you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
Refer to “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” for the procedure on how to program
HomeLink® to a miscellaneous device, as it follows the
same procedure. Be sure to determine if the device has
a rolling code, or non-rolling code before beginning the
programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmit-
ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same manner. The pro-
cedure may need to be performed multiple times to
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink®
buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
refer to the following procedure. Be sure to determine
whether the new device you want to program the
HomeLink® button to has a rolling code, or non-rolling
code.
1. Place the ignition to the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® Indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2
in “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
PROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmit-
ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
place the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure
while programming HomeLink® with the engine on
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that
the garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may
take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
○
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pushed.
○
To program the two remaining HomeLink® but-
tons, repeat each step for each remaining but-
ton. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes.
NOTE:
All channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot
be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-
held transmitter.
•
Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener
to complete the training for a rolling code.
•
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener with-
out these safety features.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The head-
light switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, and fog lights
(if equipped).
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the head-
light switch is placed in the parking lights position. How-
ever, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be acti-
vated along with the front and rear marker lights. The
DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake is
engaged.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights,
rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
lights position to the AUTO position for automatic head-
lights. Rotate to the second detent to turn on head-
lights, parking lights, and instrument panel lights
operation.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
•
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on whenever
the engine is running, and the low beams are not on.
The lights will remain on until the ignition is placed in
the OFF or ON/RUN position, or the parking brake is
engaged. The headlight switch must be used for normal
nighttime driving.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front
fog lights are turned on.
•
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle
was purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
page 179.
•
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that
side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when the haz-
ard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling
the multifunction lever back toward the steering wheel
will turn the low beams back on, or shut the high
beams off.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAMS —
IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlight system provides
increased forward lighting at night by automating high
beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
•
The Automatic High Beam Headlight system can be
turned on or off by selecting or deselecting “Auto
High Beam” within Uconnect Settings
page 179.
•
The headlight switch must also be turned to the
AUTO position after Automatic High Beams is
enabled within Uconnect Settings for the feature to
activate.
Multifunction Lever
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
•
Automatic High Beams will only activate when the
vehicle speed is above 22 mph (35 km/h).
•
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and tail-
lights of vehicles in the field of view will cause head-
lights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the wind-
shield or camera lens will cause the system to func-
tion improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlight
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See a local authorized
dealer.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and
remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. The headlight time delay
can be programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds
page 179.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL
LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off
the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to
the O (off) position.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the head-
light switch is placed in the parking lights position. How-
ever, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be acti-
vated along with the front and rear marker lights. The
DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake is
engaged.
HEADLIGHTS ON AUTOMATICALLY
WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable
through the Uconnect system
page 179.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the daytime, the
vehicle will monitor outside brightness and decide if the
instrument panel needs to be dimmed or not
page 58.
HEADLIGHT ILLUMINATION ON
APPROACH
When enabled, the headlights, exterior door handle
pocket lights (if equipped), and interior lights will illumi-
nate when the unlock button on the key fob is pushed
as the operator is approaching the vehicle. This feature
can be turned on/off, and the length of time the head-
lights stay on can be programmed for up to 90 seconds
within Uconnect Settings
page 179.
Proximity Wake-Up — If Equipped
This feature is enabled/disabled within the Uconnect
system, and is activated when the operator approaches
the driver’s door, passenger’s door, or liftgate with a
valid key fob on their person. Some exterior and interior
lights will illuminate in order to provide an increased
sense of welcome and security as the operator
approaches the vehicle in the dark. “Headlight Illumina-
tion On Approach” must be selected and set to a time
value other than zero within Uconnect Settings for Prox-
imity Wake-Up to activate.
The doors may be locked or unlocked for this feature to
activate, as long as the ignition is in the OFF position, or
during a Remote Start event. It will not activate if the
doors are locked and the ignition was placed in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
Proximity Wake-Up may not activate under the following
conditions:
•
After numerous consecutive activations, in order to
conserve the vehicle’s battery
•
After the vehicle’s engine has been off for several
days
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Animation — If Equipped
When “Headlight Illumination On Approach” is turned
on, and set to a time value above zero, the exterior
lights illuminate in a theatrical manner during approach
to the vehicle. This feature is activated in the following
situations:
•
Proximity Wake-Up (if equipped) is activated
•
Remote Start is activated
•
The unlock button on the key fob is pushed
NOTE:
For Headlight Animation to activate with Remote Start
or with the push of the unlock button, “Greeting Lights”
must also be selected within the Uconnect system.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a head-
light delay that will leave the headlights on for approxi-
mately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the igni-
tion is placed in the OFF position while the headlight
switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off.
Headlight delay can be canceled by either turning the
headlight switch on then off, or by placing the ignition in
the ON position.
NOTE:
The headlight delay time is programmable through
Uconnect Settings
page 179.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime will
sound when the driver’s door is opened.
FOG LIGHTS
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights
or the low beam headlights, and push the fog light but-
ton on the headlight switch.
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on, or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster dis-
play will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog
lights will turn off when the button is pushed a second
time, when the headlight switch is rotated to the off
position, or the high beam is selected.
Cornering Lights
The cornering lights are a feature to improve visibility at
night while turning the vehicle. When activated, a light
incorporated in the front fog light will illuminate on the
side of the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated or the
turn signal indicator is on. It can be activated through
the Uconnect system
page 179.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster will flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
BATTERY SAVER
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shed-
ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is placed in the OFF position and any door
is left ajar for 10 minutes or if the overhead console
Dome ON switch is pressed, and the interior lights are
on for 10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically
turn off.
Fog Light Button
Fog Light Button (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is in the
ON position.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is placed
in the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically
turn off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned
on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is in
the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically
turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened or the Dome ON button is pushed on
the overhead console. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry and the unlock button is pushed
on the key fob, the courtesy and dome lights will turn
on. When a door is open and the interior lights are on,
pressing the Dome Defeat button on the overhead con-
sole will cause all of the interior lights to turn off. This
allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of
time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
Front Map/Reading Lights
The overhead console lights can also be operated indi-
vidually as reading lights by pushing the corresponding
buttons.
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights
Located above the rear passenger seating in both sec-
ond and third rows, along the trim, are courtesy/
reading lights. The courtesy lights turn on when a door
or the liftgate is opened. The lights will also turn on
when the unlock button on the key fob is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push
the lens button to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Push the lens button a second time to turn
each light off.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are inboard and adjacent to the
headlight switch located on the left side of the instru-
ment panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
right dimmer control upward will increase the bright-
ness of the instrument cluster lights. Rotating the left
dimmer control will adjust the interior light levels of the
ambient lighting on the instrument panel and doors.
The ambient lighting may be color customizable
page 59.
Courtesy Lights
1 — Reading Light On/Off Buttons
2 — Dome Defeat Button
3 — Ambient Light
4 — Dome ON Button
Dimmer Controls
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
Ambient lighting in the second and third row seating
areas may not be equipped in the vehicle.
•
The dimming of the touchscreen is programmable
through the Uconnect system
page 179.
Multicolor Ambient Lighting —
If Equipped
The color of certain ambient lighting inside of the
vehicle can be selected within the Apps menu on the
radio screen, or within Uconnect Settings
page 179. Brightness is adjusted using the ambi-
ent light dimmer control on the headlight switch.
Five colors can be selected for the following two zones
inside of the vehicle:
•
Zone 1:
○ Instrument panel decorative ambient lights
○ Door panel decorative ambient lights
•
Zone 2:
○ Front seat footwell areas below the instrument
panel
○ Lighting below the second row seats
○ Map pocket lighting on all four door panels
These areas can be set to different colors, or if the
SYNC button is selected within the settings menu, all
colored lights will be set to the same color
automatically.
NOTE:
All other ambient lighting inside of the vehicle will
remain white, and the ambient light dimmer control
switch will adjust all ambient lighting at the same time.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the
lever.
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Windshield Wiper Operation
1 — Pull For Front Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
the wiper lever. Rotate the switch at the end of the lever
upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings
for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the switch at the
end of the lever upward to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation. To
turn the windshield wipers off, rotate the switch within
the lever all the way down to OFF.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the “park”
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the switch at the end
of the wiper lever to the first detent position, and then
turn the switch at the end of the lever to select the
desired delay interval. There are four delay settings,
which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a
minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of
approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you
and hold. If the lever is pulled while on the intermittent
setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several
wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever
is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the
wipers will operate several cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
•
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the pump will resume normal
operation.
•
If the front window washer feature is activated, all of
the front cameras (if equipped) on the vehicle will
be washed as well.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the
lever upward to the MIST position and release for a
single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
page 291.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield
and automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end
of the windshield wiper lever to one of the four detent
positions to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
windshield wiper lever. Wiper sensitivity position 1 is
the least sensitive, and wiper sensitivity position 4 is
the most sensitive.
NOTE:
•
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high position.
•
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the
windshield.
•
Use of products containing wax or silicone may
reduce rain sensor performance.
•
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
through the Uconnect system
page 179.
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
•
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
placed in the ON position, when the vehicle is sta-
tionary and the outside temperature is below 32°F
(0°C), unless the wiper control on the windshield
wiper lever is moved, the vehicle speed becomes
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the outside tem-
perature rises above freezing.
•
Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is ON, when the trans-
mission gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position
and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h),
unless the wiper control on the windshield wiper
lever is moved, the vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is moved out of
the NEUTRAL position.
•
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers
are not operational when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode. Once the operator is in the
vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can
resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit
conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward
to the first detent for intermittent operation
and to the second detent for continuous rear
wiper operation.
Rear Window Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward
activates the rear window washer. If the lever
is pushed while on the intermittent setting,
the wipers will turn on and operate for sev-
eral wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If
the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off posi-
tion, the wipers will operate several wipe cycles, then
turn off.
NOTE:
When the rear window washer is activated, the
ParkView Rear Back Up and Digital Rearview Mirror
(if equipped) cameras are also washed.
WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the follow-
ing conditions:
•
Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case
of a cold weather manual start with full front
defrost, and when the ambient temperature is
below 33°F (0.6°C).
•
Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the
rear defrost is turned on and when the ambient tem-
perature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
•
Activation By Remote Start Operation — When
Remote Start is active and the outside ambient tem-
perature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer and operation
will continue.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the
radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
DESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 With 10.1-inch Or 12-inch Display
Temperature Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
Front Comfort And Convenience Display
— If Equipped
The Front Comfort And Convenience Display is a retract-
able screen located below the main Uconnect display
that controls the front and rear climate settings just as
the “Controls” menu would within the Uconnect system.
Other front seat functions can also be adjusted from
this screen, such as:
•
Power Massage Seat page 40
•
Power Lumbar page 38
•
Power Bolster page 38
NOTE:
The Front Comfort And Convenience Display can only be
used if the vehicle is in the ON/RUN position.
To stow this display and access the power outlet, USB
ports, and wireless charging pad, push the screen
open/close hard button below the display, in front of
the gear selector. Pushing the button again will lower
the screen for use.
NOTE:
When the open/close button is pushed to stow the
Comfort And Convenience display screen, the screen
will turn off and save the menu it was on prior to being
stowed.
Max A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to automatically turn the air
conditioning on to the coldest temperature
setting and the highest blower speed. The
MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C
indicator will turn off. Pressing other setting buttons will
also cause the MAX A/C to turn off.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release the A/C button on the touch-
screen, or push and release the button on the
faceplate, to turn the air conditioning on. The
A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release the Recirculation button
on the touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to change the sys-
tem between recirculation mode and outside
air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside con-
ditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
Instrument Panel Climate Control Toggle Switches Front Comfort And Convenience Display Location
Screen Open/Close Button
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recir-
culation may be unavailable if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing
the mode control selection. Continuous use of Recircu-
lation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature
may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield.
AUTO Button
Press the AUTO button on the touchscreen,
or push and release the button on the face-
plate to automatically control the front driver
and passenger area’s temperature by adjust-
ing distribution and amount of airflow. Performing this
function will cause the system to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes
page 67.
AUTO mode is highly recommended for efficiency.
MAX Defrost Button
Press the MAX Defrost button on the touch-
screen, or push and release the button on
the faceplate, to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illumi-
nates when this feature is on. Performing this function
will cause the automatic climate controls to change to
manual mode.
When MAX Defrost mode is selected:
•
The blower speed increases to full (all LEDs on)
•
Air conditioning compressor is turned on (LED on)
•
Both driver and passenger temperature controls are
settoHI
•
Defrost mode is selected (LED on)
•
Rear defroster is turned on (LED on)
•
Air recirculation is turned off (LED off)
If MAX Defrost mode is turned off, the Climate Control
system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the touch-
screen, or push and release the button on
the faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and
a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Driver And Passenger Temperature
Switches
These toggle switches provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control by pushing the
single switch upward or downward.
Push the driver’s or passenger’s side toggle
switch on the faceplate upward, or press and
slide the temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the driver’s or passenger’s side toggle
switch on the faceplate downward, or press
and slide the temperature bar towards the
blue arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen
to turn the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
is used to synchronize the front passenger
temperature and rear passenger temperature, mode,
and blower settings with the driver temperature, mode,
and blower settings. Changing the front passenger or
rear passenger temperature, mode, and blower settings
while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
Instrument Panel Toggle Switches
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
NOTE:
•
When SYNC is not active, the rear passenger climate
control settings will need to be adjusted manually to
achieve desired comfort. See
page 64 and
page 66 for more information.
•
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount
of air forced through the Climate Control sys-
tem. There are several blower speeds avail-
able. The speeds can be selected using the
blower control buttons on the touchscreen.
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the num-
bered blower speed on the bar area between the blower
icons.
NOTE:
You can also adjust the blower speed by pushing the
blower control button on the faceplate. Push down to
decrease speed and up to increase speed.
Tri-Mode Climate
Three airflow distribution modes can be selected on/off
individually by pressing the icons on the touchscreen
for up to seven combinations of airflow. The icons on
the screen will illuminate when selected, and turn off
when deselected.
The three airflow modes are:
Windshield (Front Defrost outlets)
Face (instrument panel outlets)
Feet (floor outlets)
Mode Control Button On The Instrument Panel
The airflow distribution mode can also be
selected by pushing the hard button on the
instrument panel, below the radio screen.
Pushing this button will cycle through the
seven mode combinations in order: Face, Face/Feet,
Feet, Windshield/Feet, Windshield, Windshield/Face,
and Windshield/Face/Feet. The cycle will repeat if the
button is continually pushed.
NOTE:
The distribution modes on the climate control screen
will also illuminate when a selection is made using the
button on the instrument panel.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push the blower control but-
ton on the faceplate and release when the
OFF setting has been reached, to turn the
Climate Control system on/off.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front Climate Screen
The Three-Zone and Four-Zone Climate Control system
allows for adjustment of the rear climate controls from
the front screen. This can be done through either the
main Uconnect display, or the Front Comfort And Conve-
nience Display (if equipped).
Blower Control Toggle Switch
Four-Zone Rear Climate Controls From Front Climate
Screen
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If equipped with a Four-Zone Climate Control system,
the temperature of left and right sides of the rear pas-
senger zones can be adjusted separately from the front
or rear climate screens.
To change to the rear climate control screen:
•
Press the “Rear” icon on the touchscreen to display
the rear climate controls. The control functions now
operate the rear system.
•
Press the “Front” icon on the touchscreen to return
to the front climate controls.
Lock Rear Climate
Press and release the “Lock Rear” icon to
lock out manual control of the rear tempera-
ture and blower settings made from the rear
climate control display. The “Lock Rear” icon
will illuminate and the text will update to “Unlock Rear”
when this feature is selected. When the feature is dese-
lected, the text will change back to “Lock Rear” and will
no longer be illuminated.
Rear Auto Button
Press and release “Auto” on the rear climate
control screen to control the selected rear
passenger temperature by automatically
adjusting airflow distribution and amount.
The “Auto” icon will illuminate when this feature is
selected, and will turn off when deselected. Pressing
any other climate control function for the rear system
will cause the rear system to switch between manual
mode and automatic modes
page 67.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC To Driver icon on the rear
climate control screen to turn the SYNC fea-
ture on/off. SYNC is used to synchronize the
rear passenger temperature, mode, and
blower settings with the driver’s temperature, mode,
and blower settings. The SYNC To Driver indicator will
illuminate when SYNC is on. Changing the front driver
climate settings will adjust the passenger (front and
rear) settings automatically. If the front passenger or
rear climate settings are adjusted while SYNC is on,
SYNC will automatically exit.
NOTE:
When SYNC is not active, the rear passenger climate
control settings will need to be adjusted manually to
achieve desired comfort. See
page 64 and
page 66 for more information.
Rear Blower Control
Rear Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the rear cli-
mate system. There are several blower
speeds available. The speeds can be
selected using the buttons on the touchscreen. Use the
small blower icon (or blower icon with the downward
arrow) to reduce the blower setting, and the large
blower icon (or blower icon with the upward arrow) to
increase the blower setting. Blower can also be
selected by pressing the blower bar area between the
icons.
Rear Mode Control
Two airflow distribution modes for the rear seat passen-
gers can be selected on/off from the front climate
screen by individually by pressing the icons on the
touchscreen for up to three combinations of airflow.
The icons on the screen will illuminate when selected,
and turn off when deselected.
The two airflow modes are:
Face (panel outlets)
Feet (floor outlets)
NOTE:
If Auto is selected, these icons will no longer be avail-
able and the current mode selection will be overwritten.
Rear Climate Control OFF
To turn the rear climate controls off, press
the OFF button on the touchscreen, near the
blower buttons.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
Rear Climate Control Description And
Functions
The rear climate controls are located on rear of the
front center console, or if equipped, on the Rear Com-
fort And Convenience display screen located at the
front of the rear center console.
The rear Climate Control system has floor air outlets at
the right and left sides of the second and third row
seats. There are also airflow outlets on the B-pillars in
the second row seating area, as well as the side trim
panels in the third row seating area. The system pro-
vides heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehu-
midified air through the B-pillar and side trim panel
outlets.
NOTE:
If equipped with a Four-Zone ATC system, the left and
right sides of the rear passenger zones can be adjusted
separately from the front or rear climate control
displays.
AUTO BUTTON
Push the AUTO button below the rear climate
control display, or if equipped, press and
release the AUTO button on the Rear Com-
fort And Convenience Display touchscreen to
control the rear passenger area’s temperature by auto-
matically adjusting distribution and amount of airflow.
Performing this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic modes
page 67.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Push the Up or Down buttons near the rear climate con-
trol display, or if equipped, press the Up or Down arrow
buttons on the Rear Comfort And Convenience Display
touchscreen to control the rear passenger’s
temperature.
NOTE:
If equipped with a Four-Zone ATC system, the left and
right sides of the rear passenger zones can be adjusted
separately.
Push the Up arrow hard button, or press and
release, or slide the temperature bar on the
touchscreen towards the red arrow button on
the touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings.
Push the Down arrow hard button, or press
and release, or slide the temperature bar on
the touchscreen towards the blue arrow but-
ton on the touchscreen for cooler tempera-
ture settings.
Rear Climate Touchscreen (If Equipped)
Rear Climate Buttons (If Equipped)
Rear Comfort And Convenience Display Screen
(If Equipped)
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are several blower
speeds available. The speeds can be
selected using the blower control buttons near the rear
climate control display, or if equipped, on the Rear Com-
fort And Convenience Display touchscreen.
Use the blower button with the “down” arrow, or small
blower icon on the touchscreen to reduce the blower
setting. Use the blower button with the “up” arrow, or
the large blower icon on the touchscreen to increase
the blower setting.
NOTE:
Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the
numbered blower speed on the touchscreen bar area
between the blower icons.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Pushing the Mode button below the rear cli-
mate control display, located on the rear of
the center console, will cycle through the
three rear mode control options for airflow
distribution. These options are: Face, Face/Feet, and
Feet.
Mode Control From The Rear Comfort And Conve-
nience Display
If equipped with the Rear Comfort And Convenience
display, two airflow distribution modes can be selected
on/off from the display by individually by pressing the
icons on the touchscreen for up to three combinations
of airflow. The icons on the screen will illuminate when
selected, and turn off when deselected.
The two airflow modes are:
Face (panel outlets)
Feet (floor outlets)
NOTE:
If Auto is selected, these icons will no longer be avail-
able and the current mode selection will be overwritten.
REAR CLIMATE LOCK
When the rear climate controls are locked
from the front climate controls, “Unlock
Rear” will illuminate on the rear climate
screen. No adjustments to the rear climate
system can be made from the rear climate controls
while the system is locked.
When the controls are then unlocked from the front
climate controls, the text on the rear screen will update
to “Lock Rear”, and no longer be illuminated. Tempera-
ture, blower speed, and mode settings can now be
made from the rear climate controls.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL OFF
To turn the rear climate controls off, push the
OFF button below the rear climate control dis-
play, or if equipped, press and release the OFF
button on the Rear Comfort And Convenience
Display touchscreen, near the blower buttons.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE
CONTROL (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front climate control
display, and the word “AUTO” will illuminate along
with two temperatures for the driver and front pas-
senger. The system will then automatically regulate
the amount of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain, by adjusting the driver, passenger, and
rear temperatures. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve, and automati-
cally maintain, that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it
is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by
changing the front blower setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual over-
ride features. The AUTO symbol in the front climate con-
trol display will no longer be illuminated when the sys-
tem is being used in the manual mode.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
NOTE:
The system will not automatically sense the presence of
fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must
be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
glass.
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep every-
one comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If
vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR/Phone button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
•
“ Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
•
“ Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated
seats or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Climate Control system
through an intake grille, located in the right side trim
panel behind the third row seats. The heater outlets
are located in the right side trim panel, just behind
the rear doors. Do not block or place objects directly
in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The electri-
cal system could overload causing damage to the
blower motor.
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for sug-
gested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheat-
ing. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is
recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is func-
tioning properly and the proper amount, type, and con-
centration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recom-
mended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control sys-
tem when the vehicle is being stored for an extended
period of time, see
page 327.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the air distribution box, they could plug
the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service
your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when
needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer is a heating element
located at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following conditions
are met:
•
Activation By Front Defrost
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer activates automati-
cally during a cold weather manual start with full
defrost, and when the ambient temperature is
below 33°F (0.6°C).
•
Activation By Rear Defrost
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer activates automati-
cally when the Rear Defrost is operating and the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
•
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When Remote Start is activated and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C) the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
and operation will continue.
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And Vehicle
Interior Is Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(A/C) on, and blower on
high. Roll down the win-
dows for a minute to
flush out the hot air.
Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn
(A/C) on and
set the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode) and
turn
(A/C) on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If wind-
shield fogging starts to
occur, move the control
to
(Mix Mode).
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tri-Pane Panoramic
Sunroof, cabin heat generated by sunlight can be
reduced by closing the first and second row power sun-
shade, as well as the third row manual sunshade.
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
The glove compartment also has a lock cylinder that
can be locked/unlocked with the emergency key
(located inside the key fob)
page 18.
NOTE:
When valet parking your vehicle, remove the emergency
key from the key fob, as it will open the safe.
Front Center Console
The front center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
To open the lower storage compartment, push the
release button and lift up.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull the slid-
ing tab backwards to slide the door open.
Glove Compartment Release Handle
Lower Storage Compartment Release Button
Upper Storage Compartment Sliding Tab
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided
for the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage
compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push
the chrome pad on the door to open. Push the chrome
pad on the door to close.
From the fully closed position, push the chrome pad on
the door once to fully open the sunglasses bin.
From the fully open position, raise the door back up
3/4th of the way and release to achieve the conversa-
tion mirror position.
NOTE:
From the conversation mirror position, do not pull the
door fully open because it will damage the door. The
door must be put back in the closed position before
fully opening it.
Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped
The rear full center console contains both an upper and
a lower storage area.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull the slid-
ing tab rearward to slide the compartment door open.
To open the lower storage compartment, pull the
release handle and lift upward.
CAUTION!
Remove any items stored in the console cupholders
or devices with cords routing through upper storage
area. Damage may occur to upper console lid and
device cables when upper storage compartment is
lifted forward.
Phone Storage — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with two pockets, located
at the front edge of the media bin, that can hold mobile
phones.
Sunglasses Bin Door
Rear Center Console
1 — Rear Comfort And Convenience Display
2 — Console Cupholders
3 — Upper Storage Compartment
4 — USB Ports
Upper Storage Sliding Tab
Lower Storage Release Handle
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CENTER CONSOLE COOLER —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a console cooler
located in the front center console.
Press the cooler button once to turn on the cooler. The
LED will illuminate.
Press the button a second time to turn the cooler off.
The LED will turn off.
CENTER CONSOLE SAFE —
IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
safe to store your valuables. The safe is
located inside of the front center
console.
There is a keypad on the safe that con-
sists of six buttons. The first five buttons have numbers
you can select to create the lock code, while the sixth
button is the Door Open button.
The safe can be used as locked or unlocked storage.
The color of the keypad indicates the lock mode of the
safe:
•
White: Unlocked
•
Red: Locked
•
Pink: Lock code programming mode
To open the safe while it is in the unlocked
mode, simply press the Door Open button on
the keypad.
You can program a lock code by performing the follow-
ing procedure:
1. Press and hold the Door Open button for two sec-
onds. The keypad will flash pink, and then turn solid
pink.
2. Using the keypad, enter a 6-digit code. The keypad
will flash red, and then turn solid red.
3. Close the lid of the safe, and the safe will lock.
To open the locked safe, use the keypad to enter the
previously programmed 6-digit code, and then press the
Door Open button. After pressing the Door Open button,
the keypad turns white briefly to open the safe door.
The keypad will then turn red again, and return to the
locked mode when the safe lid is closed.
Phone Holder Location
Center Console Cooler Button
Scan me
Center Console Safe
1 — Emergency Override Location
2 — Keypad
Open Center Console Safe
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
NOTE:
The keypad will flash red if an incorrect lock code is
entered. If the incorrect code is entered ten times in a
row, the user will be locked out from further attempts
for approximately 30 minutes.
To revert the safe back to the unlocked mode:
1. Enter the programmed 6-digit code.
2. Press and hold the Door Open button for two sec-
onds. The keypad will flash red and change to pink.
3. Enter the 6-digit code and press the Door Open but-
ton. The keypad will flash white.
Once this procedure is completed, the safe will no lon-
ger lock when the lid is closed.
Lock Code Override
If you forget the 6-digit code, there is a way to override the
code, using the emergency key stored inside your key fob:
1.
Remove the emergency key from the key fob
page 18
.
2. Use the emergency key to open the safe door.
3. Press and hold the reset button, located under the
lid, for two seconds.
The safe will return to the unlocked mode.
NOTE:
When valet parking your vehicle, remove the emergency
key from the key fob, as it will open the safe.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for the second row seating
windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels, and
the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks that
the sun screens attach to when pulled up.
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. Con-
tinue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the top
of the window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
base sill.
USB/AUX CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into one of the USB ports, located in the center
stack of the instrument panel.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port will acti-
vate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features, if
equipped. Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay® can also
be activated wirelessly. For further information, refer to
“Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time, and
both ports will provide charging capabilities. Only one
port can transfer data to the system at a time.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB
port and another device is plugged into the Type C USB
port, a message will appear and allow you to select
which device to use.
The following are scenarios when a non-phone device is
plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports, and
when a phone device is plugged into the smaller and
larger USB ports:
•
“A new device is now connected. Previous connec-
tion was lost.”
•
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
•
“Another device is in use through the same USB
port. Please disconnect the first device to use the
second device.”
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause
the connection to a previous device to be lost.
Reset Button Location
Sun Screen Extended
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Connecting AUX Or The External USB
Device
Use a connection cable to connect an external USB
device to the vehicle’s USB port, or use an auxiliary
cable to connect a device to the vehicle’s AUX port.
These ports are located below the climate controls.
To the right of the front media hub is an HDMI port
used for the Passenger Display feature
page 201.
For vehicles not equipped with the Passenger Display
feature, the front media hub configuration will appear
different.
Once a device is connected to the USB port, it will begin
charging and is ready for use with the system. Type C
and Type A charge-only USB ports can be used at the
same time but cannot be used simultaneously while
playing media. When both Type C and Type A charge-
only USB ports are in use they will be charged at a
reduced rate.
If equipped, your vehicle may have additional charge-
only USB ports in the center compartment.
NOTE:
If the device’s battery completely discharges, it may not
communicate with the Uconnect system until a mini-
mum charge is attained. Leaving the device connected
to the USB port may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using a USB cable to connect an external device:
•
The device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing the artist, track title, and album
information on the radio display.
NOTE:
Depending on track configuration, track information
may not be present on the radio display.
•
The device can be controlled using the radio buttons
to play, and browse the contents of the device.
•
The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB port.
Front Media Hub USB/AUX Ports
1—USBCPort
2—USBAPort
3—AUXPort
4 — HDMI Port (If Equipped)
Front Media Hub USB/AUX Ports — Without Passenger
Display
1—USBCPort
2—USBAPort
3—AUXPort
Center Compartment USB Charge-Only Ports
1—USBCPort
2—USBAPort
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
By using an auxiliary cable to connect an external
device:
•
The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s
sound system. The Uconnect system will not display
information related to the artist, track title, and
album information.
NOTE:
When using the AUX port, the external device cannot be
controlled using the radio buttons. The device will not
charge.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
Second And Third Row USB Ports —
If Equipped
If equipped, the second row USB ports can be used to
charge a device.
If equipped, in the third rows, a set of two USB ports can
be used to charge a device. These ports are charge only.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the charge only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen
that the device is not supported by the system.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered electrical
accessories. The power outlets are labeled with either a
“key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is
powered. Power outlets labeled with a key symbol are
powered when the ignition switch is in the ON position,
while the outlets labeled with a battery symbol are con-
nected directly to the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
•
All accessories connected to the battery powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system needs to be replaced.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets
as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel, below the
climate controls.
Center Console Rear USB Ports
1 — Type C Mini USB Ports (Charge Only)
2 — Type A Standard USB Ports (Charge Only)
Third Row USB Ports
1—TypeCUSBPort
2—TypeAUSBPort
Third Row USB Ports
1—TypeAUSBPort
2—TypeCUSBPort
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a
power outlet located on the rear of the front center
console.
The rear cargo power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
NOTE:
The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to battery
(powered at all times) by switching the power outlet
right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel from fuse
location F90 to F91
page 297.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an elec-
tric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
(Continued)
CAUTION!
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the gen-
erator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
POWER INVERTER
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on
the back of the center console to convert DC current to
AC current. This outlet can power cellular phones, elec-
tronics and other low power devices requiring power up
to 150 Watts. Certain video game consoles exceed this
power limit, as will most power tools.
Front Power Outlet
Front Center Console Power Outlet
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
Power Inverter
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is
exceeded, the power inverter automatically shuts down.
Once the electrical device has been removed from the
outlet the inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on elec-
trical devices prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an elec-
tric shock and failure.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi® wire-
less charging pad located below the center stack,
within the storage compartment. This charging pad is
designed to wirelessly charge your Qi® enabled mobile
phone. Qi® is a standard that allows wireless charging
of your mobile phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi® wireless
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi® wireless
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a spe-
cialized back plate can be purchased from your mobile
phone provider or a local electronics retailer. Please
see your phone’s Owner’s Manual for further
information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat to hold your mobile phone in place, and an LED
indicator light.
Place the device inside the prepared area delimited in
the mat as shown in the image. Incorrect positioning
will prevent the phone from charging.
LED Indicator Status:
•
No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a
device. Device may not be compatible with the Qi®
standard.
•
Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging.
•
Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign object
is detected.
•
Green Light: Device has completed battery charging
(if device is equipped to transmit this information).
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless
Charging Pad:
•
The presence of the Near-Field Communication
(NFC) function active on a smartphone could signal
malfunction anomalies.
•
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position in
order for the phone to charge.
•
To avoid interference with the key fob search, the
wireless charging pad will stop charging when any
door or liftgate is opened, even if the engine is
running.
•
Be sure to place the mobile device correctly (display
facing upward, and phone not covering the LED) on
the wireless charging pad.
•
If the phone moves on the pad causing the red light
to illuminate, the phone will have to be picked up
and placed back on the charging pad to resume
charging.
•
Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone
is connected to a wired charger.
•
The phone’s protective case must be removed when
placed on the wireless charging pad.
•
iPhone® 12 (including iPod®) is equipped with soft-
ware to protect the device from overheating. When
the software is active, the rate of charge is slowed
down to protect the device.
•
Phones must always be placed on the wireless
charging pad within the outline shown on the pad so
that its charging parts connect with the charging
coils of the system. Movement of the phone during
charging may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
•
Having multiple applications open on the phone
while charging will reduce the charging efficiency,
and may even shut down an application that is
actively running (i.e. Apple CarPlay®). This may also
cause the phone to overheat.
•
Wireless chargers may implement certain methods
to prevent the phone from overheating during charg-
ing such as slowing down the rate of charge. In cer-
tain instances, the device may shut down for a brief
period of time (when the device reaches a certain
Wireless Charging Pad
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
temperature). If this happens, it does not mean
there is a fault with the wireless charging pad. This
may just be a protective measure to prevent dam-
age to the phone.
•
The use of multiple wireless functions at the same
time (wireless charging, Apple CarPlay®, Android
Auto™) could cause the device to overheat, resulting
in limitation of the functions or it turning off. In this
case, it is recommended to connect the system
using the USB port.
•
Do not place the key fob or any other type of metal/
magnetized object inside the mobile phone housing
or near the wireless charging pad.
•
With a compatible device placed on the charging
pad, and the ignition is cycled to the OFF position, a
reminder message may appear on the instrument
cluster display to warn the driver.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad
or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can cause
excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob. Plac-
ing the fob in close proximity of the charging pad
blocks the fob from being detected by the vehicle and
prevents the vehicle from starting.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The power window controls, located on the driver's door
trim panel, operate the window movement for all four
power windows.
There is a single switch on the front passenger door
and rear passenger doors which operates the windows
for only that door.
NOTE:
•
The power window switches remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition has been placed in the
OFF position. Opening a vehicle front door will can-
cel this feature.
•
The window controls will operate only when the vehi-
cle’s ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN position. Occu-
pants, particularly unattended children, can become
(Continued)
WARNING!
entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in seri-
ous injury or death.
Automatic Window Features
Both the driver and front passenger windows, and if
equipped, both rear windows, may have Auto-Down and
Auto-Up operations.
Auto-Down Feature
For windows equipped with the AUTO feature, push the
window switch down to the second detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the
switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
For windows equipped with the AUTO feature, lift the
window switch up to the second detent, and release;
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch
briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
Driver’s Door Power Window Switches
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
2
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure.
If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close
the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
Front Doors
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
Rear Doors
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Release the window switch, and within five seconds,
pull the window switch up again for an additional
two seconds.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button (the indi-
cator light on the button will turn on). To enable the win-
dow controls, push and release the window lockout but-
ton again (the indicator light on the button will turn off).
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs
with the rear windows open, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buf-
feting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
RADIO SIGNAL DEVICES ON
WINDSHIELD — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with premium tint infra-
red reflective glass (IRR). In the necessity of mounting
devices such as transponders, garage door openers,
radar detectors, or any other device that sends out a
radio signal, please refer to the allocated area on the
windshield. There is a small box located near the pas-
senger side of the mirror cover. The location is identifi-
able by a slight discoloration in the glass due to the
removal of the IRR coating.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
TRI-PANE POWER SUNROOF
The power sunroof switches are located on the over-
head console between the courtesy/reading lights.
Power Window Lockout Switch
Radio Signal Device Mounting Location
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrap-
ment may result in serious injury or death.
•
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening And Closing The Sunroof
The sunroof has two programmed automatic stops for
the sunroof open position; a comfort stop position and
a full open position. The comfort stop position will mini-
mize wind buffeting within the interior cabin.
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from
any position. The sunroof will open to the comfort stop
position and stop automatically. Push the switch rear-
ward and release again to continue to the full open
position.
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from
any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop
automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other movement of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward
to open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close opera-
tion will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will
remain in a partially opened position until the switch is
operated and held again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when Express
or Manual Open operation is initiated the sunshade will
automatically open to the half open position prior to the
sunroof opening.
Venting Sunroof
Push and release the Vent button within one half sec-
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade was not already open, it will automati-
cally open prior to the roof opening to the vent position.
Opening And Closing The Power
Sunshade
The sunshade has two programmed positions: half
open and full open positions. When operating the sun-
shade from the closed position, the sunshade will
always stop at the half open position regardless of
express or manual open operation. The switch must be
pressed again to continue on to full open position.
If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade cannot
be closed beyond the half open position. Pushing the
sunshade close switch when the sunroof is open/
vented with the sunshade at half open position will first
automatically close the sunroof prior to the sunshade
closing.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Opening/Closing Sunshade
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
2
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade switch rearward and release it
within one-half second, the sunshade will open to the
half open position and stop automatically. Push and
release the switch again from the half open position
and the sunshade will open to the full open position
and stop automatically.
Push the sunshade switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunshade will close
automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other actuation of the sunroof switches will stop the
sunshade in a partially open position.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward, the sun-
shade will open to the half open position and stop auto-
matically. Push and hold the sunshade switch again
and the sunshade will open to the full open position.
Push and hold the switch forward and the sunshade will
close and stop at full closed position.
Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in motion
will stop the sunshade in a partially open position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Ignition Off Operation — If Equipped
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
If equipped with this setting, the Ignition Off timing is
programmable through the Uconnect system
page 179.
Third Row Sunroof
The sunroof over the third row seating has a single fixed
glass pane with a manual sunshade. To open the sun-
shade, pull the handle toward the front of the vehicle.
To close the sunshade, pull the handle toward the rear
of the vehicle.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear
out any debris that may have collected in the tracks.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath the driv-
er’s side of the instrument panel.
2. Reach under the hood from outside the vehicle,
move the safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
Hood Release
Safety Latch Location
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLOSING THE HOOD
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing the lift-
gate button on the key fob or by pushing the electronic
liftgate release handle
page 27.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is
open, pushing the button twice within five seconds a
second time will close the liftgate.
NOTE:
If all doors are programmed to unlock on first press
within Uconnect Settings
page 179, all doors will
unlock when you push the electronic liftgate release. If
only the driver’s door is programmed, only the liftgate
will unlock when you push the electronic liftgate
release.
NOTE:
•
Use the power door lock switch on either front door
trim panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the
liftgate.
•
The driver's door lock cylinder will not lock and
unlock the liftgate.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passen-
gers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the lift-
gate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
NOTE:
The liftgate can also be opened manually by pushing
the electronic liftgate release handle and pulling
upward in one fluid motion.
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
There are several different ways to close the liftgate:
•
Manually (grab the liftgate closing handle and pull
downward)
•
Key fob
•
Hands-free (if equipped)
•
Liftgate close button in the cargo area
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry button, located
to the left of the electronic liftgate release handle, will
lock the vehicle only.
If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be closed by
pushing the liftgate close button located in the cargo
area on the left rear trim panel, near the liftgate open-
ing. If the liftgate is in motion, pushing the liftgate close
button a second time will reverse the liftgate operation.
ADJUSTABLE POWER LIFTGATE
HEIGHT
The maximum height that the liftgate will open can be
adjusted and saved so that the liftgate will only open to
the desired height. To set a desired height, proceed as
follows:
1. Open the liftgate fully, then manually pull down on
the liftgate to the desired height.
2. Push and hold the liftgate close button, located on
the left side trim panel inside the cargo area, for
three seconds. An audible chime will be heard to let
you know the height has been saved.
Liftgate Entry
1 — Passive Entry Button
2 — Electronic Liftgate Release Button
Liftgate Close Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
2
To reset the saved height setting to a new setting, pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate, then manually push the liftgate
upward to its full open position.
2. Manually pull the liftgate down to the new desired
height and hold the liftgate close button for three
seconds until the audible chime is heard.
Power Liftgate Malfunction Procedure:
1. In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate,
the liftgate can be released by accessing the service
release feature in the latch. This can be done using
a 3 mm diameter screwdriver.
2. From inside the gate, an eyelet can be seen. Place
the screwdriver in the eyelet.
3. Rotate the screwdriver handle to actuate the lever
and release the latch.
4. If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
power liftgate functionality.
HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE
To open or close the liftgate using hands-free activa-
tion, use a straight in and out kicking motion under the
vehicle activation zone in the general location between
the park sensors. The activation zone is about 1 ft
(0.3 m) on each side from the centerline of the vehicle.
A sweeping motion under the activation zone can also
be used for hands-free activation to open or close the
liftgate.
NOTE:
The activation zone is the same for vehicles equipped
with or without a trailer tow package.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the liftgate
will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate
will open after approximately one second, or close after
approximately three seconds. These settings can be
enabled or disabled through Uconnect Settings
page 179.
NOTE:
•
Opening or closing the Hands-Free Liftgate requires
a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the liftgate handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is
not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond
to any kicks, and will perform inhibit chimes to
inform the user about the missing key fob.
•
The distance from the rear fascia/bumper to the
foot shall be no more than 8 inches (20 cm) to be
recognized as a valid kick.
•
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or
off through the Uconnect system
page 179.
•
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be turned
off during jacking, tire changing, manual car wash,
and vehicle service.
Liftgate Service Release
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
Valid Kicking Motion
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
•
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature can be activated by
any metallic object making a similar in-and-out
motion under the rear fascia/bumper, such as
cleaning using a metal broom.
•
The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the
transmission is in PARK.
•
If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate while it
is opening or closing, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed/open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
•
The Hands-Free Liftgate will not open with the key
fob in the cupholder or anywhere inside the vehicle.
•
There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along
these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the
open position.
•
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstruc-
tions within the same cycle, the system will auto-
matically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be
operated manually.
•
The power liftgate will release, but not power open,
in temperatures below −12°F (−24°C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate
before opening the liftgate.
•
If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of
time (approximately one hour), the liftgate may need
to be closed manually to reset power liftgate
functionality.
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually
pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the liftgate
obstacle detection feature and stop the power opera-
tion or reverse its direction.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Storage
The load floor is designed for a maximum load of
300 lb (136 kg).
Additional storage can be found under the storage lid.
To access the lower storage, lift the handle and raise
the storage lid.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area sides,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle
is moving.
Lift Load Floor Handle
Tie-Down Hooks
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
2
WARNING!
•
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
•
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying pur-
poses only, not for passengers, who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
•
Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
vehicle to sway.
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
Foldable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to secure
loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect
passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Remove the folded cover from the storage pouch,
and unfold using a twisting motion.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the
slots on each side of the pillar trim.
3. Hook the straps to the inside post of the rear head
restraint on each side.
Foldable Cargo Area Cover
Step 2
Step 3
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
To store the foldable cargo area cover, reverse the
installation steps and replace the cover into its storage
pouch.
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed in
the rear cargo bin. Crossbars should always be used
whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the
straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does
not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
INSTALLING THE CROSSBARS
There are two crossbars equipped with your vehicle.
They are located in the rear cargo bin, stored in foam
blocks.
There is also a packet of fastener screws and a Torx
wrench provided in the foam blocks. You can find the
packet of fastener screws in the left foam block and the
Torx wrench in the right foam block.
There are three positions that the crossbars can be
installed in. There are also tie-down loops next to each
crossbar location on both sides of the roof.
Folding The Cargo Cover
1 — Remove Cover From Vehicle
2 — Twist Cover
3 — Push Twisted Cover Inward
4 — Place Folded Cover In Pouch
Stowed Crossbars
1 — Fastener Screws
2 — Torx Wrench
Crossbar Locations
1 — Position 1
2 — Position 2
3 — Position 3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
2
NOTE:
The crossbars should only be used in positions 1 and
2 or positions 1 and 3. They are not designed to be
used in positions 2 and 3.
NOTE:
There are arrows on top of the crossbars that indicate
the direction that they should be installed. The arrows
should point forward toward the front of the vehicle.
To install the crossbars, refer to the following
procedure:
1. Remove the crossbars from the foam blocks.
2. Swivel the outboard stanchion on the crossbar and
rotate it 180 degrees around the bolt to the open
position. Open the outboard stanchion on the oppo-
site end of the crossbar as well.
3. Using the provided torx wrench, loosen the torx bolts
on both ends of the crossbar.
4. Using the provided wrench and fasteners, bolt the
fasteners to the side rail.
Crossbar and Tie Down Loop Locations
1 — Crossbar Installation Location
2 — Tie-Down Loop Locations
Crossbar Directional Arrow
Step 2
Open Outboard Stanchion (Underside Shown)
Step 3
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
An indicator on the wrench will show when the fas-
tener is tightened to the indicated torque specifica-
tion. The slanted line will line up with arrow when
torquing.
5. Tighten down the torx head bolts on the inboard
stanchion.
NOTE:
It is important that the screws are left loose until
both sides of the crossbar are secured to the rail.
6. Repeat steps 2-5 for the second crossbar in the
desired position.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
•
To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
•
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load
appropriately.
•
Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratchet-
ing mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the
straps and thumb wheels frequently to be sure
that the load remains securely attached.
•
Long loads that extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front
and rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
Torque Wrench Indicator
Step 4
Step 5
Installed Crossbars
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
2
CAUTION!
•
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-
fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
REMOVING THE CROSSBARS
To remove the crossbars, refer to the following
procedure:
1. Using the provided torx wrench, loosen the torx
head bolts on the stanchion. Do this on both ends of
the crossbar.
2. Using the provided wrench, remove the bolts that
secure the crossbar to the roof rail. Repeat this on
the other end of the crossbar.
3. Depress the swing key, and swivel the outboard
stanchion 180 degrees back to the stowed position.
4. Repeat steps 1-3 for the second crossbar.
5. Place the crossbars back into the foam blocks in the
rear cargo storage bin.
Step 1
Bolt Location
Depress The Swing Key
Step 3
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
89
3
Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster Dis-
play controls located on the steering wheel will allow
you to change your display from Digital to Analog.
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
○
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Temperature Gauge
○
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
○
The pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or oth-
ers could be badly burned by steam or boiling cool-
ant. It is recommended to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats
page 293.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
3. Tachometer
○
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
4. Fuel Gauge
○
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
○
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
NOTE:
The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will illumi-
nate briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is first
cycled.
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
3
Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster Dis-
play controls located on the steering wheel will allow
you to change your display from Digital to Analog.
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
○
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Temperature Gauge
○
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
○
The pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or oth-
ers could be badly burned by steam or boiling cool-
ant. It is recommended to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats
page 293.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
3. Tachometer
○
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
4. Fuel Gauge
○
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
○
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
NOTE:
The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will illumi-
nate briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is first
cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Depending on your vehicles trim level, features and
options may vary.
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster dis-
play, which offers useful information to the driver. With the
ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the total
miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important informa-
tion about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a
driver interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show how systems are
working and give you warnings when they are not. The
steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll
through the main menus and submenus. You can access
the specific information you want and make selections
and adjustments.
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
1. Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up
arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu.
2. OK Button
Push the OK
button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
Push and hold the OK button for one second to
reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
3. MENU Button
Push the MENU button to access/select the infor-
mation screens or submenu screens of the Home
Screen display. Push and hold the OK button to
enter edit mode.
4. Left Arrow Button
Push the left
arrow button to return to the main
menu from an info screen or submenu item.
5. Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down
arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu.
6. Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right
arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu screens
of a main menu item.
Display Options
Holding OK will also allow you to change your display to
Digital or Analog.
•
Digital theme will be the default theme
•
Menu screen times out after 10 seconds. Press OK
to reactivate
•
Speedometer must always be present
•
Relevant warning notifications and other pop-up info
will still be displayed in the main screen area (In this
case the speed moves to the top)
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Up Arrow Button
2 — OK Button
3 — Menu Button
4 — Left Arrow Button
5 — Down Arrow Button
6 — Right Arrow Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
3
Custom Tile Configuration
To customize the instrument cluster further, you are
able to select up to five tiles to display information
based on your needs.
•
Press the MENU button for the Home Screen display
•
Navigate Left or Right to highlight desired
Tile
•
Press OK to select the tile and navigate to the
selected submenu and press OK again to add your
selection to your tile view
•
The main menu options of the home screen are
Driver Info, Vehicle Info, Navigation — If Equipped,
Audio, and Off Road
•
To edit, press menu button, then Hold OK to edit
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
portion of the cluster and consist of multiple sections:
•
Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will illu-
minate in gray under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
white for on demand information
•
Submenu Dots — Whenever there are submenus
available, the position within the submenus is
shown here
•
Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
•
Gear Selector Status (PRND)
•
Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy and Time)
•
Air Suspension Status — If Equipped
•
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Status — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display will normally display the
main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the
main menu. The main display area also displays pop-up
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible
warning or information messages. These pop-up mes-
sages fall into several categories:
•
Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous
screen. Most of the messages of this type are then
stored (as long as the condition that activated it
remains active) and can be reviewed from the “Mes-
sages” main menu item. Examples of this message
type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and
“Low Tire Pressure.”
•
Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
the condition that activated the message is cleared.
Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”
(if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
leaves the vehicle with the lights on).
•
Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote
Start feature. This message type is displayed until
the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this
message type are “Remote Start Canceled - Door
Ajar” and “Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to
Start.”
•
Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous
screen. An example of this message type is “Auto-
matic High Beams On.”
Menu Button
Customizable Tile Layout
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
cator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for five sec-
onds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style and envi-
ronmental conditions.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK or arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display con-
trols for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2.
Push and release the down
arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right
arrow button to
access the “Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If con-
ditions are met, the gauge and numeric display will
update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a
pop-up message of “To reset oil life engine must be
off with ignition in run” will be displayed (for five
seconds), and the user will remain at the Oil Life
screen.
5. Push and release the up
or down arrow
button to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
DISPLAY AND MESSAGES
May include the following, but not limited to:
Front Seat Belts Unbuckled Oil Change Due ACC Override
Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled Fuel Low Cruise Set To XXX mph or km/h
Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled Service Anti-lock Brake System Service Shifter
Traction Control Off Service Electronic Throttle Control Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s)
Washer Fluid Low Service Power Steering Service Tire Pressure System
Oil Pressure Low Cruise Off Park Brake Engaged
Oil Level Low – If Equipped Cruise Ready Brake Fluid Low
Engine Temperature Hot Lights On Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out Left Front Turn Signal Light Out Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
3
Ignition or Accessory On Vehicle Not In Park Remote Start Active Push Start Button
Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low Remote Start Canceled Hood Open Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
Remote Start Canceled Door Open Remote Start Canceled Time Expired Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
Service Air Bag System Service Air Bag Warning Light Door Open
Doors Open Hood Open Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D
Liftgate Open Shift Not Allowed Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P Service Transmission
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white or yellow telltales area on the left, and the green
or red telltales area on the right.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
MENU ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
main menu items for several features. Use the up
and down arrow buttons to scroll through the
driver interactive display menu options until the desired
menu is reached.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
Home Screen
Press the Menu button to display the Home Screen.
Push and release the left
or right arrow button
to highlight the desired selection. Push and release the
OK button to select. Press the up
or down arrow
button to select a different screen within the selected
category. If the Menu button is pressed in this view, the
instrument cluster will return to the previously displayed
screen.
Home Screen Options
•
Navigation
○ Map Display
○ Trip Trip A/Trip B
•
Vehicle Info
○ Coolant Temp
○ Stop/Start Status — If Equipped
○ Trans Temp
○ Oil Temp
○ Oil Pressure
○ Battery Voltage
○ Oil Life
○ Oil Level – If Equipped
○ Tire Pressure
○ Fuel Economy
•
Main Menu — If Equipped
○ Posted Speed Limit Sign
○ Driver Assist
•
Audio
○ Audio Info
•
Off Road
○ Selec-Terrain/Air Suspension Status
○ Steering Angle
○ Pitch
○ Roll
Main Menu — If Equipped
Speedometer
While viewing the Speedometer menu title, push and
release the left
or right arrow button until the
Night Vision menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the OK button to
toggle units (mph or km/h) of the speedometer. Hold
the OK button to toggle between Analog and Digital
speedometer.
Night Vision
While viewing the Speedometer menu title,
push and release the left
or right
arrow button until the Night Vision menu title
is displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Arrow buttons and submenu indicators disappear after
five seconds of menu navigation inactivity. Pedestrian/
Animal icons will be displayed in the top left location
page 157.
Driver Assist
While viewing the Speedometer menu title, push and
release the left
or right arrow button until the
Driver Assist menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. The Driver Assist screen indicates the
current status of ACC, Active Lane Management and
Active Driving Assist/Assist+/Pilot
page 224.
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push the left
or right
arrow button to scroll through the information
submenus.
Fuel Economy
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Current Fuel Economy
•
Range To Empty
•
Press the OK
button to reset the average fuel
economy
NOTE:
The Range feature is not able to be reset through the
instrument cluster display controls.
Gauge Summary
•
Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
Displays the current temperature of the coolant.
•
Transmission Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
•
Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
•
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
•
Battery Voltage
Displays the current voltage level of the battery.
Oil Life
•
Displays the current oil life of the vehicle.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
•
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle icon is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the icon.
•
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire
To XX” is displayed with the vehicle icon and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the icon with the
pressure value of the low tire are displayed in a dif-
ferent color than the other tire pressure value.
•
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Ser-
vice Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire Pressure is an information only function, and can-
not be reset
page 229.
Stop/Start Status — If Equipped
•
Display current status of Stop/Start system.
Trip
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Toggle the left
or right arrow but-
ton to select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will
display the following:
•
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) trav-
eled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
•
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or
Trip B since the last reset.
•
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of
travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Navigation
Push and release the left or right arrow button
until the Navigation display icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display.
•
“Hold OK to Start Route” will display when no active
routeisset.
•
“Hold OK to Cancel Route” will display when an
active route is set.
Off Road
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Off Road Menu icon/title is highlighted. Push
the left
or right arrow button to scroll the
submenus.
•
Terrain Status
○ Selec-Terrain Status
○ Air Suspension Status
•
Vehicle Dynamics
○ Wheel Articulation
○ Transfer Case Status
○ Steering Angle
•
Pitch And Roll
○ Vehicle Pitch
○ Vehicle Roll
Trailer Tow — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trailer Tow Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the left
or right arrow button to select Trailer Trip or
Trailer Brake.
Trailer Trip will display the following:
•
Distance
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
3
NOTE:
Press and hold the OK button to reset all the
information.
Trailer Brake will display the following:
•
Output
•
Type
•
Gain
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. This menu will display the
audio source information, including the Song name,
Artist name, and audio source with an accompanying
graphic.
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This fea-
ture shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the left
or right arrow button will allow
you to see what the stored messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu icon will
be a closed envelope.
Settings
NOTE:
If current theme is set to Digital, tachometer will not
display while in the Settings menu.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Head Up Display (HUD),
feature settings are available at any vehicle speed
page 98.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Settings Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK
button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts
on the screen as needed. The Settings feature allows
you to change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location that informa-
tion is displayed.
Upper Left
None Fuel Economy
Average
Compass
Outside Temp Trip A Distance Time
Range To Empty
(RTE)
Trip B Distance Fuel Economy
Current
Upper Right
None Fuel Economy
Average
Compass
Outside Temp Trip A Distance Time
Range To Empty
(RTE)
Trip B Distance Fuel Economy
Current
Current Gear
•
On
•
Off
Tachometer
•
Show with Digital Theme
•
Hide with Digital Theme
Odometer
•
Show
•
Hide
Favorite Menus
Drive Stored
Messages
Audio
(Show/Hide)
Trip
(Show/Hide)
Vehicle Info Trailer Tow
Off Road
(Show/Hide)
Navigation
(Show/Hide)
NOTE:
Menus with (show/hide) can push the OK button to
choose whether to show or hide this menu on the
instrument cluster display.
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
•
Restore
•
Cancel
HEAD UP DISPLAY (HUD) —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
The HUD feature Settings are available at any vehicle
speed. Some information like speed limit or Driver
Assist will not appear on the HUD unless your vehicle is
equipped Traffic Sign Assist or Driver Assist systems.
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Settings Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the left
right arrow button until the HUD Menu icon/
title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to enter HUD. Use the
up
or down arrow button to select a setting,
then push and release the OK button to adjust the
setting.
•
ON/OFF
When “Display On” is selected, the HUD will display
on the windshield. When it is not selected, there will
be no display on the windshield.
•
Content and Layout
○ Simple: Speed, Speed Limit
○ Standard: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation
When “Standard” mode is selected, the HUD
image is split into thirds with the speed limit
indicator shown to the left, vehicle speed in the
center, and turn-by-turn navigation to the right.
○ Advanced: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation, Driver
Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane Management,
Active Driving Assist), Gear (only available in
Sport mode)
When “Advanced” mode is selected, the HUD
displays the vehicle speed, turn-by-turn naviga-
tion, speed limit, driver assist function(s), and
current gear.
○ Custom 1: Speed, Speed Limit
○ Custom 2: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation
○ Custom 3: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation, Driver
Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane Management,
Active Driving Assist)
○ Custom 4: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation, Driver
Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane Management,
Active Driving Assist), Gear (only available in
Sport mode)
•
Display Height
•
Brightness
NOTE:
•
The HUD basic settings (Brightness, Display Height
and Non Custom layouts), are controlled through the
Settings Screen in the Instrument Cluster
page 92.
•
If current theme is set to Digital, tachometer will not
display while in the Settings menu.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY
SAVER MODE MESSAGE —
ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION
ACTIONS (IF EQUIPPED)
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sen-
sor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electri-
cal system and status of the vehicle battery.
HUD ON/OFF
Standard Mode
Advanced Mode
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
3
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure,
or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, elec-
trical load reduction actions will take place to extend
the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is
done by reducing power to or turning off non-essential
electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is run-
ning. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due
to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge
at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
•
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diagnos-
tic on the charging system continuously.
•
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indi-
cate a problem with the charging system
page 101.
The electrical loads that may be switched off
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
•
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
•
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
•
HVAC System
•
115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
•
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
the following conditions:
•
The charging system cannot deliver enough electri-
cal power to the vehicle system because the electri-
cal loads are larger than the capability of the charg-
ing system. The charging system is still functioning
properly.
•
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping, etc.).
•
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and simi-
lar devices.
•
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
•
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of
time (weeks, months).
•
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
•
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left
on when the vehicle was parked.
•
The battery was used for an extended period with
the engine not running to supply radio, lights, char-
gers, +12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum
cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
•
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
○ Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
○ Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports
○ Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
○ Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
•
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories,
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if
any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).
•
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
•
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips,
and if the evaluation and driving pattern of the
vehicle did not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which
you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always
refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a
failure indication. All active telltales will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may appear differ-
ent based upon equipment options and current vehicle
status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. This
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault
is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a colli-
sion. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault
is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Con-
tact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Drowsy Driver Detected Warning Light —
If Equipped
Drowsy driver detection helps to avoid
crashes caused by fatigue by advising driv-
ers to take a break in time. Once Drowsy
Driver is detected, A pop-up will display con-
tinuously until the driver presses the OK button to clear.
Once the pop-up message is cleared, it is stored until
the condition is no longer true.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system
page 124.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
3
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the
light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the trans-
mission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake ped-
als are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is run-
ning, immediate service is required and you may experi-
ence reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or
engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The
light will come on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant tem-
perature is too high, this indicator will illumi-
nate and a single chime will sound. If the
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL
(N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading
does not return to normal, turn the engine off immedi-
ately and call for service
page 273.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Night Vision Animal Detected Warning
Light — If Equipped
The Night Vision Animal Warning Light will
illuminate in red when an animal is detected
directly in the vehicle’s path, near the head-
lights, and a collision is possible.
If enabled, a chime will sound and a video pop-up may
display when a detection occurs.
Night Vision Pedestrian Detected
Warning Light — If Equipped
The Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light
will illuminate in red when a pedestrian is
detected directly in the vehicle’s path, near
the headlights, and a collision is possible.
If enabled, a chime will sound and a video pop-up may
display when a detection occurs.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the
engine as soon as possible, and contact an
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the
engine.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the engine oil temperature is high. If the light
turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle (keep engine running). If the
temperature does not return to normal after a few min-
utes, turn off the engine and call for service.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver
or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound
page 233.
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This
may occur with strenuous usage such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the
vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with
the transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the
light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may con-
tinue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
system is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning
and service is required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to operate nor-
mally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the brake system
inspected by an authorized dealer.
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is a fault
detected in the air suspension system.
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Electric Park Brake is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light
This warning light will indicate when the ESC
system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position,
and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the
engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
•
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator
Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
•
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN,
the ESC system will be on, even if it was
turned off previously.
Service Active Lane Management
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Active Lane Management system is not oper-
ating and requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
3
Active Lane Management Warning Light
— If Equipped
The Active Lane Management Warning Light
will be solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The warning
light will flash when the vehicle is crossing
the lane marker
page 153.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
2 gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a
chime will sound. The light will remain on
until fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low
page 285.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnos-
tic System called OBD II that monitors
engine and automatic transmission control
systems. This warning light will illuminate when the igni-
tion is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition
switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The
vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and drive-
ability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
Night Vision Animal Detected Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the Night
Vision Warning System has detected an ani-
mal approaching in the vehicle’s path.
Night Vision Pedestrian Detected
Warning Light — If Equipped
This indicator light alerts the driver that the
Night Vision System has detected a pedes-
trian approaching in the vehicle’s path.
Oil Level Sensor Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the engine oil level sensor. Contact
an authorized dealer for service.
Service 4WD Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a
fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays
on or comes on during driving, it means that
the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. We recommend you drive
to the nearest service center and have the vehicle ser-
viced immediately.
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Warning Light
This light will turn on when the ACC is not
operating and needs service
page 126.
Service Forward Collision (FCW) Or
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)
Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the FCW or PEB System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service
page 227.
Service Stop/Start System Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a mes-
sage is displayed to indicate that the tire
pressure is lower than the recommended
value and/or that slow pressure loss is
occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel
consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition previously
mentioned, the display will show the indications corre-
sponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell-
tale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS mal-
function indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is rec-
ommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light
— If Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a failure
with the tow hook. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
3
Drowsy Driver Detected System Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Drowsy Driver Detected System is not operat-
ing correctly and requires service. Please
see an authorized dealer.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the 4WD Low mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
wheels
page 119.
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air suspen-
sion system is actively adjusting the ride
height
page 121.
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height
Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air suspen-
sion system is set to the Aerodynamic setting
page 121.
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator
Light— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the vehicle is
manually or automatically lowered from ride
height position downward for easy entry and
exit of the vehicle
page 121.
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air suspen-
sion system is set to the Off-Road 1 setting
page 121.
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air suspen-
sion system is set to the Off-Road 2 setting
page 121.
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator light will illu-
minate If a fault is detected, it will be indi-
cated by a yellow ‘HOLD!’ indicator light that
will stay on as long as the fault condition
exists.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Or
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) Off
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that FCW or PEB is off
page 227.
Maximum Payload Exceeded Indicator
Light
This light indicates that the maximum pay-
load may have been exceeded or load level-
ing cannot be achieved at its current ride
height.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD
power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL mode
and the front and rear driveshafts are disen-
gaged from the powertrain.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when TOW/
HAUL mode is selected.
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Indicator Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and the
vehicle in front is detected
page 126.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
No Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and the
vehicle in front is not detected
page 126.
Auto HOLD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Auto HOLD keeps your vehicle at a complete
stop without you having to keep your foot on
the brake pedal. Once engaged a green
“HOLD” indicator will appear in the Instru-
ment Cluster Display.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set to the desired speed
page 126.
Front Fog Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on
page 54.
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
— If Equipped
The Active Lane Management indicator light
illuminates solid green when both lane mark-
ings have been detected and the system is
“armed” and ready to provide visual and
torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure
occurs
page 153.
Night Vision Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the Night
Vision Warning System status is Active
page 157.
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light indicates when a rear seat belt has
been buckled in the second row. A telltale
will display in the upper right corner of the
instrument cluster display to correspond to
the specific seating position once the seat belt has
been buckled
page 233.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on
page 54.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport mode is
active.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode
page 124.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash indepen-
dently and the corresponding exterior turn
signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
3
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ACC has been
turned on, but is not set
page 127.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is ready, but not set
page 126.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC feature is
turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC
is armed. HDC can only be armed when the
transfer case is in the 4WD Low position and
the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC
feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
— If Equipped
When the Active Lane Management system
is ON, but not armed, the Active Lane Man-
agement indicator light illuminates solid
white. This occurs when only left, right, or
neither lane line has been detected. If a single lane line
is detected, the system is ready to provide only visual
warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs on
the detected lane line
page 153.
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light indicates when a rear seat belt is
unbuckled in the second row. When the igni-
tion is first placed in the ON/RUN position, and
if a seat belt in the second row is unbuckled, a
light corresponding to the specific seat will turn on in the
upper right portion of the instrument cluster display,
momentarily replacing the configurable corner informa-
tion. If a second row seat belt that was buckled at the
start of the trip is unbuckled, the Rear Seat Belt Reminder
Light will change from the buckled to the unbuckled sym-
bol, and a chime will sound
page 233
.
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear passenger
seats are unoccupied, and will illuminate in
the upper right portion of the instrument
cluster display, momentarily replacing the
configurable corner information.
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when Selec-Speed Con-
trol is activated.
To activate Selec-Speed Control, ensure the
vehicle is 4WD Low and push the button on
the Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter Selec-Speed
Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With the
low beams activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle)
to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass”
scenario.
GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Night Vision Suppressed Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the Night
Vision Warning System status is Suppressed
page 157.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and trans-
mission control systems. When these systems are oper-
ating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent perfor-
mance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions
well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be driveable and not need towing,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause fur-
ther damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a connection
port to allow access to information related to the perfor-
mance of your emissions controls. Authorized service
technicians may need to access this information to
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle
and emissions system
page 179.
WARNING!
•
ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order
to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.
•
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
○ Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING!
○ Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control sys-
tem. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is function-
ing and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be deter-
mined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail
the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things
will happen:
○
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
○
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replace-
ment, you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the previously men-
tioned test routine may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
3
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their
seat belts.
WARNING!
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a com-
plete stop, then shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and apply the parking brake.
•
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in
the OFF position, key fob is removed from the
vehicle and vehicle is locked.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL (N) or PARK
(P) position before you can start the engine. Apply the
brakes before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Do not shift from REVERSE (R), PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ —
IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is in the passenger
compartment.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P).
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP
button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut
off. The ignition will remain in the ON/RUN position
until the gear selector is in PARK and the button is
pushed twice to the OFF position.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h), the instrument clus-
110
ter will display a “ Vehicle Not In Park” message and
the engine will remain running. Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine will shut off
and the ignition will remain in the ON/RUN position. If
vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
vehicle may AutoPark
page 111.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has two positions: OFF, and RUN. To
change the ignition positions without starting the
vehicle and use the accessories, follow these
directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to return the ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure
is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster
page 89.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with plac-
ing the vehicle in PARK (P) should the situations on the
following pages occur. It is a back-up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary method by
which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
•
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster
display and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator
is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
•
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back up system and should not
be relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
•
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
•
Ignition is switched from RUN to OFF
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the engine
will turn off and the ignition switch will change to
ON/RUN position. After 30 minutes the ignition
switches to OFF automatically, unless the driver turns
the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
•
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
•
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
•
Driver’s door is ajar
•
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “ AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift
to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed
in the instrument cluster. In these cases, the gear
selector must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “ Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P”
will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
4
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the trans-
mission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed
drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the
NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle
in 4WD LOW.
The message “ AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when both
of these conditions are met:
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Driver’s door is ajar
The message “ AutoPark Not Engaged” will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will
continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the
driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument cluster
display and on the gear selector. As an added precau-
tion, always apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure and has not experienced
an extended park condition (i.e., parked for more than
30 days), it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal
all the way to the floor and hold it there while the
engine is cranking. This should clear any excess fuel in
case the engine is flooded. The starter motor will
engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator
pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the con-
verter and vehicle.
•
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
erly
page 271.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(BELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use
of an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
TURBOCHARGER “COOL DOWN” —
3.0L ENGINE ONLY
The 3.0L engine is equipped with an after-run pump to
cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depend-
ing on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the
pump will run for up to 20 minutes after the engine has
been shut off to circulate coolant through the turbo-
charger. Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet
operation, it is normal to hear it running during this time.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is coiled and strapped
right behind the engine air cleaner filter assembly from
the manufacturer.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt elec-
trical cord could cause electrocution.
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
An initial break-in period is recommended for the pow-
ertrain (engine, transmission, axle, etc.) in your vehicle.
Adhering to the following the guidelines will contribute
to improved longevity, fuel economy, and performance.
Drive moderately during the first 100 miles (160 km).
After that, for the first 500 miles (800 km), avoid long
periods at constant speed. Varying speed, engine RPM,
and throttle position is desirable.
Avoid high performance, severe off-road, and towing for
the first 500 miles (800 km).
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (km) of operation. This should be con-
sidered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as a problem. For engines not equipped with an
oil level sensor, please check your oil level frequently
during the break-in period. Add manufacturer-approved
oil as required
page 334.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result. ONLY USE OILS
THAT ARE API APPROVED
page 334.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers simple
operation, and some additional features that make the
parking brake more convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
•
Manually, by applying the EPB switch.
•
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea-
ture in the customer programmable features section
of the Uconnect settings.
The EPB switch is located on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering wheel (below the headlamp
switch).
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the
switch momentarily. You may hear a sound from the
back of the vehicle while the parking brake engages.
Once the parking brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE
telltale light in the instrument cluster and an indicator
on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
pedal while you apply the parking brake, you may notice
a small amount of brake pedal movement. The parking
brake can be applied even when the ignition switch is
OFF but the BRAKE telltale light will not illuminate, how-
ever, it can only be released when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB fault light will illuminate if the EPB switch is
held for longer than 20 seconds in either the released
or applied position. The light will extinguish upon
releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmis-
sion is placed in PARK. If your foot is on the brake
pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal
movement while the parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when the
ignition is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE,
the driver’s seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is
made to drive away.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot
on the brake pedal, then push the EPB switch down
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back of
the vehicle while the parking brake disengages. You
may also notice a small amount of movement in the
brake pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged, the BRAKE telltale light in the instrument cluster
and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, other-
wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of
PARK.
Electric Park Brake Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
4
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement
and possible injury or damage.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always turn the ignition
off, secure the key fob, and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to a brake
failure and a collision.
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary
to engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, maintain upward pressure on the EPB switch
for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE tell-
tale light will illuminate, and a continuous chime will
sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the parking brake, when the
vehicle reaches approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), the
parking brake will remain engaged.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or
repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle,
may cause serious damage to the brake system. Be
sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driv-
ing; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a
collision.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB sys-
tem, a yellow EPB fault light will illuminate. This may be
accompanied by the BRAKE telltale light flashing. In this
event, urgent service of the EPB system is required. Do
not rely on the parking brake to hold the vehicle
stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied automati-
cally whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and the
transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is
enabled and disabled by customer selection through
the customer programmable features section of the
Uconnect Settings
page 192.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed
by pushing the EPB switch to the release position while
the transmission is placed in PARK.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will
engage the parking brake automatically if the vehicle is
left unsecured while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
The parking brake will automatically engage if all of the
following conditions are met:
•
The vehicle is at a standstill.
•
There is no attempt to press the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
•
The seat belt is unbuckled.
•
The driver’s door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the
EPB switch while the driver’s door is open. Once manu-
ally bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again once the
vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is
turned to the OFF position and back to ON again.
Hold ‘N Go — If Equipped
Hold ‘N Go is a comfort feature that allows the driver to
remove their foot from the brake pedal once the vehicle
has come to a stop. The vehicle must be held at a
standstill for a predetermined amount of time by
hydraulic braking. The EPB will then engage and con-
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
tinue to hold the vehicle at a stop until the driver
applies the accelerator pedal. Hold ‘N Go can be acti-
vated or deactivated by pushing the AUTO HOLD button
located on the switch bank.
The following conditions must be met for Hold ‘N Go to
activate:
•
Driver’s door is closed
•
Driver's seat belt is fastened
•
Vehicle is at a standstill
•
Forward gear is selected
•
ACC is not engaged
•
EPB is not applied
•
ParkSense Active Park Assist System auto parking
maneuver is not activated
Brake Maintenance Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
You should only enter Brake Maintenance mode during
brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary
for you or your technician to push the rear piston into
the rear caliper bore. With the EPB system, this can
only be done after retracting the EPB actuator. Fortu-
nately, actuator retraction can be done easily by enter-
ing the Brake Maintenance mode through the Uconnect
Settings in your vehicle. This menu-based system will
guide you through the steps necessary to retract the
EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake service.
Maintenance mode has requirements that must be met
in order to be activated:
•
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
•
The parking brake must be unapplied.
•
The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in Maintenance mode, the EPB fault lamp will
flash continuously while the ignition is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following
steps must be followed to reset the parking brake sys-
tem to normal operation:
•
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
•
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
•
Apply the EPB switch.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
out of PARK.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
•
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator sol-
idly indicates PARK without blinking. Ensure that
the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK
position is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL (N)
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
(Continued)
AUTO HOLD Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
4
WARNING!
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE (R) only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE (D) when the engine is above idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK (P)
before the ignition can be turned to the OFF position.
This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the
vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This
system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever
the ignition is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the igni-
tion is in the ON/RUN position (even though the engine
will be off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK,
and the ignition is OFF (not in ON/RUN position) before
exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
INTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds
the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal
must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The trans-
mission gear range (PRND) is displayed both above the
gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a
gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. You must
press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or mov-
ing at low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE
range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is returned to
the proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its
shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with envi-
ronmental and road conditions. The transmission elec-
tronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts
on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and precision shifts will develop
within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal
when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual
downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control. Pushing the GEAR “-”/GEAR
“+” switches (on the steering wheel) while in the DRIVE
position will select the highest available transmission
gear, and will display that gear limit in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Some models will display both
the selected gear limit, and the actual current gear,
while in ERS mode.
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The engine can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
•
Apply the parking brake.
•
Shift the transmission into PARK.
•
Turn the ignition OFF.
•
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer
case is in a drive position.
CAUTION!
•
Before moving the transmission gear selector out
of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
•
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have properly engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
•
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is
not blinking.
•
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with the engine running. Apply the park-
ing brake and shift the transmission into PARK (P) if you
must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the igni-
tion to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing see
page 173.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle see
page 275.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear
page 118. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm-up time of the engine and transmission
to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the
Transmission Gear Selector
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
4
torque converter clutch is inhibited until the transmis-
sion fluid is warm. Normal operation will resume once
the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home mode is activated. In this mode, the trans-
mission may operate only in certain gears, or may not
shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely
degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations,
the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the instru-
ment cluster will inform the driver of the more serious
conditions, and indicate what actions may be
necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message indi-
cates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if possible. If
not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest pos-
sible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your
transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the high-
est available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE
and ERS mode is not active. For example, if you set the
transmission gear limit to FOURTH gear, the transmis-
sion will not shift above FOURTH gear (except to prevent
engine overspeed), but will shift through the lower
gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the transmission gear selector is
in DRIVE, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the “-”
button (on the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode,
display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and
set that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS
mode, tapping the “-” or “+” button will change the top
available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the “+” button
until the gear limit display disappears from the instru-
ment cluster.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Electronic Range Select (ERS)
1 — Shift Up “+”
2 — Shift Down “–”
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
Select TOW/HAUL mode when driving in conditions
such as: driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc. This mode will improve performance
and reduce the potential for transmission overheating
or failure due to excessive shifting.
The TOW/HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instru-
ment cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has been
activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores nor-
mal operation. Normal operation is always the default at
engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch
must be pushed each time the engine is started.
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving in
icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine brak-
ing can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the
vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of
vehicle control, which may cause an accident possibly
resulting in personal injury or death.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
QUADRA-TRAC I OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS/PRECAUTIONS —
IF EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range only)
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time four-
wheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake
Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines stan-
dard ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to
any wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque
transfer to wheels with traction.
NOTE:
The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate for condi-
tions where 4WD LOW range is recommended
page 176.
QUADRA-TRAC II OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS/PRECAUTIONS —
IF EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac II transfer case is fully automatic in the
normal driving 4WD AUTO mode. The Quadra-Trac II
transfer case provides three positions:
•
4WD AUTO
•
N (Neutral)
•
4WD LOW
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW
position can be used for increased torque at the
wheels. Driving in the 4WD LOW position on dry, hard-
surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD
AUTO position at a given road speed. Take care not to
overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the park-
ing brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position dis-
engages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
SHIFT POSITIONS
For additional information on the appropriate use of
each four-wheel drive system mode position, see the
following information:
4WD AUTO
This range is the default operating mode for daily use.
TOW/HAUL Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
4
N (NEUTRAL)
This range disengages the driveline from the pow-
ertrain. It is used for towing your vehicle behind another
vehicle
page 173.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the park-
ing brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position dis-
engages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides
an additional gear reduction which allows for increased
torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels
while providing maximum pulling power for loose, slip-
pery road surfaces. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
SHIFTING PROCEDURES
4WD AUTO To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h),
the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine run-
ning, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N), and push
and hold the 4WD LOW button once on the transfer
case switch until the 4WD LOW indicator light begins to
flash in the instrument cluster. The 4WD LOW light will
remain on solid when the shift is complete.
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met a message will
show on the instrument cluster display with instructions
required to complete the shift
page 92.
4WD LOW To 4WD AUTO
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h),
the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine run-
ning, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N), and push
the 4WD LOW button once on the transfer case switch
until the 4WD LOW indicator light begins to flash in the
instrument cluster. The 4WD LOW light will go out when
the shift is complete.
NOTE:
•
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met a message
will show on the instrument cluster display with
instructions required to complete the shift
page 92.
•
Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop-
erly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to
occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle roll-
ing 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is mov-
ing faster than 3 mph (5 km/h), the transfer case
will not allow the shift.
QUADRA-DRIVE II SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Drive II System features two torque transfer
couplings. The couplings include an Electronic Limited-
Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle and the Quadra-Trac II
transfer case. The ELSD axle is fully automatic and
requires no driver input to operate. Under normal driv-
ing conditions, the unit functions as a standard axle,
balancing torque evenly between left and right wheels.
With a traction difference between left and right
wheels, the coupling will sense a speed difference. As
one wheel begins to spin faster than the other, torque
will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less
traction, to the wheel that has traction. While the trans-
fer case and axle coupling differ in design, their opera-
tion is similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II transfer case
shifting information, preceding this section, for shifting
this system.
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
SELEC-TERRAIN MODE SELECTION
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
best performance for all terrains. Tap the toggle up or
down to cycle through the positions.
4WD LOW Button
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
Selec-Terrain consists of the following positions:
•
ROCK
(if equipped) –
Off-road calibration is only avail-
able in 4WD LOW. The vehicle is raised (if equipped
with Air Suspension) for improved ground clearance.
Traction-based tuning with improved steerability for
use on high traction off-road surfaces. Use for low
speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
If equipped with air suspension, the vehicle level will
change to Off-Road 2 (OR2). If the Selec-Terrain switch
is in ROCK mode, and the transfer case is switched
from 4WD LOW to 4WD AUTO, the Selec-Terrain system
will return to AUTO.
•
SAND (if equipped) – Off-road calibration for use on
low traction surfaces such as sand or wet grass.
Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding
may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic
brake controls are set to limit traction control man-
agement of throttle and wheel spin. If equipped with
air suspension, the default ride height for SAND is
Normal Ride Height (NRH).
•
MUD (if equipped) – Off-road calibration for use on
low traction surfaces such as mud. Driveline is maxi-
mized for traction. Some binding may be felt on less
forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are
set to limit traction control management of throttle
and wheel spin. If equipped with air suspension, the
level will change to Off-Road 1 (OR1).
•
SNOW – Tuning set for additional stability in inclem-
ent weather. Use on and off road on loose traction
surfaces such as snow. When in SNOW mode
(depending on certain operating conditions), the
transmission may use SECOND gear (rather than
FIRST gear) during launches, to minimize wheel slip-
page. If equipped with air suspension, the default
ride height for SNOW is Normal Ride Height (NRH).
•
AUTO – Fully automatic full-time four-wheel drive
operation can be used on and off road. Balances
traction with seamless steering feel to provide
improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
drive vehicles. If equipped with air suspension, the
level will change to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
•
SPORT – This mode alters the transmission's auto-
matic shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift
speeds are increased to make full use of available
engine power. Steering efforts are modified for
sporty driving. If equipped with air suspension, the
level will change to Aero Height.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
MESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster
page 92.
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
The Quadra-Lift Air Suspension system provides full-
time load leveling capability along with the benefit of
vehicle height adjustment by a toggle switch. The
vehicle will automatically raise and lower the ride height
to adapt to the appropriate driving conditions. At higher
speeds, the vehicle will lower to an aerodynamic ride
height and when operating in off-road modes
(if equipped), the vehicle will raise the ride height
accordingly. The buttons near the terrain switch in the
center console area can be used to set preferred ride
height to match the appropriate conditions.
Selec-Terrain
1 — Selec-Terrain Positions
2 — Selec-Terrain Toggle
Quadra-Lift Switch
1 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable, 4x4 only)
2 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable, 4x4 only)
3 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
4 — Aero Height Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
5—
Entry/Exit Height Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
6 — Toggle Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
4
•
Normal Ride Height (NRH)
– This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
driving.
•
Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately
1.2 inches [30 mm])
– This is the primary position
for all off-road driving until OR2 is needed. A
smoother and more comfortable ride will result.
Push the toggle switch forward once from the NRH
position while the vehicle speed is below 38 mph
(61 km/h). When in the OR1 position, if the vehicle
speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h) and
50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if
the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the
vehicle will be automatically lowered to NRH
page 176. OR1 is unavailable on 4x2 air sus-
pension vehicles.
•
Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately
2.0 inches [51 mm]) – This position is intended for
off-roading use only where maximum ground clear-
ance is required. To enter OR2, push the toggle
switch forward twice from the NRH position or once
from the OR1 position while vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the vehicle
speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height
will be automatically lowered to OR1
page 176.
OR2 is unavailable on 4x2 air suspension vehicles.
•
Aero Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately
-0.6 inches [-15 mm])
– This position provides
improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The
vehicle will automatically enter Aero Height when
the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph
(100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater
than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds
66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will return to
Default Ride Height from Aero Height if the vehicle
speed remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and
35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if
the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h).
The vehicle will enter Aero Height, regardless of
vehicle speed if the vehicle is in “SPORT” mode.
•
Entry/Exit Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately
-1.6 inches [-40 mm])
– This position lowers the
vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well
as lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading
and unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Height,
push the toggle switch down twice from NRH while
the vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h). To exit
Entry/Exit Height, push the UP button once while in
Entry/Exit Height or drive the vehicle over 4 mph
(6 km/h).
NOTE:
Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/Exit
Height can be enabled through the Uconnect Touch-
screen Radio. If this feature is enabled, the vehicle
will only lower if the gear selector is in PARK, the
terrain switch is in AUTO, the transfer case is in
AUTO and the vehicle level is either in Normal or
Aero Height. The vehicle will not automatically lower
if the air suspension level is in OR2 or OR1. When
towing, the automatic Entry/Exit feature may be dis-
abled through the Uconnect Touchscreen Radio to
prevent vehicle and trailer movement when gear
selector is moved to PARK.
The Selec-Terrain system will automatically change the
vehicle to the proper height based on the position of
the Selec-Terrain switch. The height can be changed
from the default Selec-Terrain setting by normal use of
the air suspension buttons
page 120.
The system requires that the engine be running for all
changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors,
including the liftgate, must be closed. If a door is opened
at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will
not be completed until the open door(s) is/are closed.
The Quadra-Lift Air Suspension system uses a lifting
and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from
incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising
the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and
then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will
move down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the
air suspension system operates briefly; this is normal.
The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to
ensure a proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the Quadra-Lift Air
Suspension system has a feature which allows the
automatic leveling to be disabled
page 179.
NOTE:
Default Ride Height:
•
Select Aero Height or Normal Ride Height as the
default for all vehicle speeds and operation. This is
the selected height that the suspension will level for
speed changes (e.g. raising from Entry/Exit Height
at speed, lowering from Off Road Height at speed,
etc.).
•
Default ride height can be changed by manually
adjusting the Quadra-Lift switch to Normal Ride
Height or Aero Ride Height and stay in the selected
height for 2.5 seconds. It will be stored as the
default ride height and the height will be maintained
until a new default ride height is selected.
If equipped with a Uconnect Touchscreen Radio, all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be
done through the radio
page 179.
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure vol-
ume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal
injury or damage to the system, see an authorized
dealer for service.
AIR SUSPENSION MODES
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to pro-
tect the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension
system has a feature which allows the automatic level-
ing to be disabled
page 179. Tire/Jack mode is
used for connecting a trailer with a weight-distributing
hitch
page 165.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine
running.
Auto Entry/Exit Mode
To assist in entering and exiting the vehicle, the air sus-
pension system has a feature which automatically low-
ers the vehicle to Entry/Exit Height
page 179.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine
running. When towing, the automatic Entry/Exit feature
may be disabled through the Uconnect Touchscreen
Radio to prevent vehicle and trailer movement when
the gear selector is moved to PARK.
Transport Mode
To assist with flatbed towing, the air suspension system
has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit
Height and disable the automatic load leveling system
page 179.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
Suspension Display Messages Mode
The “Suspension Display Messages” setting allows you
to only display suspension warnings instead of all sus-
pension messages (i.e., “Normal Height Achieved”)
page 179.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine
running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must
be enabled which will move the vehicle to Normal Ride
Height and disable the air suspension during the align-
ment
page 179.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine
running.
If equipped with a Uconnect Touchscreen Radio, all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be
done through the radio
page 179.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
MESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster
page 92.
OPERATION
The indicator lamps 1 through 5 will illuminate to show
the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator
lamps will show a position which the system is working
to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are
flashing while raising, the highest flashing indicator
lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing while
lowering the lowest solid indicator lamp is the position
the system is working to achieve.
Toggle up once moves the suspension one position
higher from the current position, assuming all condi-
tions are met (i.e., engine running, speed below thresh-
old, etc.). Toggle up can be pushed multiple times. Each
toggle up will raise the requested level by one position
up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest posi-
tion allowed based on current conditions (i.e., vehicle
speed, etc.).
Toggle down once moves the suspension one position
lower from the current level, assuming all conditions
are met (i.e., engine running, doors closed, speed
below threshold, etc.). Toggle down can be pushed mul-
tiple times. Each toggle down will lower the requested
level by one position down to a minimum of Park mode
or the lowest position allowed based on current condi-
tions (i.e., vehicle speed, etc.)
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator
lamps and instrument cluster display messages will
operate the same for automatic changes and user
requested changes.
•
Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 1 through 5 will
be illuminated.
•
Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 2 through 5 will
be illuminated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
4
•
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps
3 through 5 will be illuminated.
•
Aero Height – Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be
illuminated.
•
Entry/Exit Height – Indicator lamp 5 will be
illuminated.
•
Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-
nated. Driving or deselecting the mode in the
Uconnect system will disable Transport mode.
•
Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 1 and 5 will be
illuminated. Driving or deselecting the mode in the
Uconnect system will disable Tire/Jack mode.
•
Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 4 and
5 will be illuminated. Driving or deselecting the
mode in the Uconnect system will disable Wheel
Alignment mode.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L AND 6.4L
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full func-
tionality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system is designed to pro-
vide increased vehicle response and ease of maneuver-
ability in tight spaces. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions. If the electric
power steering system experiences a fault that prevents
it from providing assist, you will still have the ability to
steer the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System
page 179.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEER-
ING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF –
SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within
the instrument cluster display, this indicates the vehicle
needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service
page 100
.
NOTE:
•
Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
•
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer
for service.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER
STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed
on the instrument cluster screen, they indicate that
extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which
caused an over temperature condition in the electric
power steering system. Once driving conditions are
safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few
moments until the icon and message turn off.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel
consumption. The system will stop the engine automati-
cally during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are
met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accel-
erator pedal will automatically restart the engine
page 125.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
parts, to handle the additional engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. At that time, the system will go
into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are
met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE
Autostop mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
•
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
“STOP/START READY” message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section
page 92.
•
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
•
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position, and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine-running condition.
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE
DOES NOT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/
Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster
display Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations,
the engine will not stop:
•
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
•
Driver’s door is not closed.
•
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
•
Battery charge is low.
•
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
•
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
•
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
•
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
•
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
•
Hood is open.
•
Vehicle is in Part-Time 4WD, 4WD Lock, 4WD LOW,
or an off-road Selec-Terrain mode.
•
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
•
Accelerator pedal input.
•
Engine temperature is too high.
•
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been achieved
from previous Autostop.
•
Steering angle is beyond threshold.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of
the items listed above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
AUTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the accelerator pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage
upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto-
matically While In Autostop Mode:
•
The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
•
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
•
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
•
Battery voltage drops too low.
•
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
•
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
•
Part-Time 4WD, 4WD Lock, 4WD LOW, or an off-road
Selec-Terrain mode is selected.
•
An off-road Selec-Terrain mode is selected.
•
Steering angle is beyond threshold.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The
“STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display and the Autostop mode will be dis-
abled
page 92.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the ON
mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and back
ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A "SERVICE
STOP/START SYSTEM" message and a yellow Stop/Start
telltale will appear in the instrument cluster display
page 92.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized dealer.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
4
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
•
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles NOT equipped with the Active Driving Assist
(ADA) system:
•
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled, and functions as normal cruise control.
•
If ACC is not enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always
be aware of the feature selected.
•
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable,
and vice versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelera-
tor operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control.
“CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is on.
To turn the system off, push the on/off button a second
time. “CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is off.
The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system
or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always ensure the sys-
tem is OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a
speed has been set, a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET
TO MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating what speed was
set. A cruise indicator lamp, along with set speed will
also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when
the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed
by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
•
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result ina1mphspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 mph.
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — On/Off
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•
Pushing the SET (+),orSET(-) button once will
result ina1km/hspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 km/h.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until
the button is released. The new set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set
speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur
so it may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or
normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Cruise Control system without erasing
the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
•
Vehicle parking brake is applied
•
Stability event occurs
•
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
•
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the
OFF position, will also erase the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving conve-
nience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on high-
ways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety sys-
tem and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise
Control function performs differently
page 126.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect
a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
•
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
•
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system.
•
In vehicles NOT equipped with the Active Driving
Assist system, Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not
enabled) will not detect vehicles directly ahead of
you. Always be aware of the feature selected
page 338.
WARNING!
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
4
WARNING!
safe operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
•
The ACC system:
○ Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
○ Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
○ Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
○ Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop and hold
the vehicle in the stop position for approximately
10 minutes when following a vehicle ahead. If
the vehicle ahead does not start moving within
10 minutes, the parking brake will be activated,
and the ACC system will be canceled.
•
You should switch off the ACC system:
○ When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
○ When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
downhill slopes.
○ When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
○ When circumstances do not allow safe driving at
a constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the ACC system.
Driving Assist Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current
system settings for Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Active
Lane Management (ALM), and the Active Driving Assist
(ADA) system. The information it displays depends on
ACC, ALM, and ADA system statuses.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
once and the following will appear in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off”.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET”.
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instru-
ment cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
•
System Cancel
•
Driver Override
•
System Off
•
ACC Proximity Warning
•
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state,
the instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display
will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Distance Increase Button
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — CANC/Cancel
4 — Distance Decrease Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off (If Equipped)
7 — RES/Resume
8 — SET (-)/Decel
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
•
When in 4WD Low
•
When the brakes are applied
•
When the parking brake is applied
•
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
•
When the brakes are overheated
•
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
•
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
•
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of your
vehicle in close proximity
•
When ESC Full Off mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time,
the system will turn off and the instrument cluster dis-
plays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (if equipped) can be used
without ACC enabled. To change between the different
modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns the
ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing
the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button will result
in turning on (changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control
mode.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph
(32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
•
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond
the set speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER
OVERRIDE” will display in the instrument cluster
display.
•
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be control-
ling the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be deter-
mined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
•
The brake pedal is applied
•
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
•
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
•
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates
•
The vehicle parking brake is applied
•
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
•
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
•
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
•
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
•
Driver door is opened at low speeds
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
4
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
•
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
•
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control (if equipped) on/off
button is pushed
•
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
•
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the accel-
erator pedal. The instrument cluster display will show
the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
•
While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop longer than two seconds, the driver
will either have to push the RES (resume) button or
press the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC
system.
•
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by push-
ing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
•
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result ina1mphspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 mph.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result ina1km/hspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 km/h.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until
the button is released. The new set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) button, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
•
When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
•
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
after two seconds the driver will either have to push
the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator
pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
•
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change
on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshift-
ing may occur while climbing uphill or descending
downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to
maintain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking tem-
perature exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (lon-
gest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar
(short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle
speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting appears in the
instrument cluster display.
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain
the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in
the same lane, the instrument cluster display will show
the ACC Set With Target Detected indicator light, and
the system will adjust the vehicle speed automatically
to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
•
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
•
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
•
The distance setting is changed.
•
The system disengages page 129.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC sys-
tem applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to main-
tain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument cluster display
and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display
is a warning for the driver to take action and does not
necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide
an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to
assist in passing the vehicle. This additional accelera-
tion is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on the left
side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will
resume motion, without any driver interaction, if the
vehicle ahead starts moving within two seconds of your
vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the
driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to
the existing set speed.
NOTE:
•
If your vehicle is at a standstill for longer than two
seconds, the system will hold brake pressure for up
to 10 minutes. If no driver action is taken after the
10 minutes, the Electric Park Brake will be applied
and the ACC system will cancel.
•
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill (or
the vehicle is traveling below 3 mph (5 km/h), and
the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the Electric Park Brake will be applied and
the ACC system will cancel.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Distance Settings
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
4
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when condi-
tions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such
as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument clus-
ter display will display the warning message and the
system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels
with reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after
the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal
of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of
the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
•
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
•
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure
and require a sensor realignment.
•
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged
due to a collision, see your authorized dealer for
service.
•
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermar-
ket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system fail-
ure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
•
If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at an
authorized dealer.
•
Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
warning will display, and a chime will sound when con-
ditions temporarily limit system performance. This most
often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow
or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such
as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside
of glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display
will read “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any
vehicles or objects in its path this warning may tempo-
rarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full
functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster dis-
play reads “ACC Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still driv-
able under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later,
following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see
an authorized dealer.
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only with an
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller. Aftermarket trailer
brake controllers will not activate the trailer brakes
when ACC is braking.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merg-
ing in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may
move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause
your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no vehicle in front detected. Once
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until
it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may
not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-
changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to
apply the brakes if necessary.
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until
they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Offset Driving Condition Example
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
4
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the
vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle
ahead is stopped in your lane. It will consider this
stopped vehicle a stationary object as it did not previ-
ously detect movement from it. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) system uses a camera
mounted on the windshield, as well as map data when
the vehicle is equipped with Navigation, to detect recog-
nizable road signs such as:
•
Speed limits
•
School zones
•
No passing zones
NOTE:
•
The TSA system will automatically display the
detected road sign using the unit of measurement
(mph or km/h) selected within Uconnect Settings, or
within the instrument cluster display.
•
If no speed limit signs are detected, the system will
revert to the speed limit signs that are stored in the
Navigation system.
•
The system always checks the traffic signs indicat-
ing the current speed limit. The system is able to
recognize and display up to two different road signs
in the instrument cluster display. These road signs
can be found on the Driver Assist page.
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION
The TSA System can be enabled/disabled within the
Uconnect system through the Safety/Driver Assistance
menu. System ON is signaled by road signs shown on
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
Even if the system is OFF, the speed limit sign will be
displayed when the driver selects it in the HOME
screen.
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST MODES
TSA has three selectable modes of operation that are
available through the Uconnect system
page 179.
Visual
When Visual is selected, the system will alert the driver
when the current speed of the vehicle exceeds the
detected speed limit by showing a graphic in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Visual + Chime
When Visual + Chime is selected, the system will alert
the driver when the current speed of the vehicle
exceeds the detected speed limit by showing a graphic
in the instrument cluster display and by sounding an
audible alert. The audible alert will last for 10 seconds,
and the visual alert will remain on as long as the
vehicle is exceeding the speed limit.
TSA Off
When the TSA system is turned off, the system will not
show any traffic signs (unless selected in the HOME
screen, which will show detected speed limit signs), and
no alerts will be issued to the driver.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
Detected traffic signs are shown in the instrument clus-
ter display, and can display any combination of signs at
one time (e.g. speed limit, speed limit and supplemen-
tal info, and “Do Not Pass” signs) depending on what
information is available.
When a newly detected speed limit is higher than the
current speed limit, the display will update along with
an up arrow.
When a newly detected speed limit is lower than the
current speed limit, the display will update along with a
down arrow.
NOTE:
Up or down arrows will be displayed for up to five
seconds.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
Supplemental Information
Supplemental information may be displayed along with
a newly detected speed limit indicating special circum-
stances the driver should be aware of. Available supple-
mental information includes:
•
School
•
Construction
•
Rain
•
Snow
•
Fog
NOTE:
Supplemental information will not be displayed when
the vehicle is ONLY equipped with GPS.
Speed Limit Exceeded
When the vehicle’s speed exceeds the displayed speed
limit by 3 mph (5 km/h), the speed limit sign on the
instrument cluster display will show a red outline to
alert the driver.
CAUTION!
•
Functionality may be limited or the system may not
work if the sensor is obstructed.
•
The system may have limited operation or not work
at all in weather conditions such as heavy rain,
hail, and thick fog. Strong light contrasts can influ-
ence the recognition capability of the sensor.
•
The area surrounding the sensor must not be cov-
ered with stickers or any other object.
•
Do not tamper or perform any operations in the
area of the windshield glass directly surrounding
the sensor.
•
Clean foreign matters such as bird droppings,
insects, snow or ice on the windshield. Use specific
detergents and clean cloths to avoid scratching the
windshield.
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
OPERATION
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is combined with
the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system, and centers
the vehicle in the driving lane while traveling at speeds
up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
For ACC system operating instructions and system limi-
tations, see
page 127.
NOTE:
•
The driver should always obey traffic laws and
speed limits. Never drive above applicable speed
limit restrictions.
•
The driver can override ADA at any time by braking,
accelerating, or steering the vehicle.
Just like ACC, ADA will maintain a set speed as long as
the set distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front is maintained. ADA will also keep your vehicle
centered between the lane lines, and monitor for other
vehicles in adjacent lanes by utilizing the Blind Spot
Monitoring sensors.
Two types of Active Driving Assist systems are available:
•
Base ADA system
•
Hands-Free ADA system
Base Active Driving Assist System — If Equipped
The Base ADA system uses sensors within the steering
wheel to measure driver attentiveness, and requires
that the driver have their hands on the steering wheel
at all times.
The system will generally aim to keep the vehicle cen-
tered in the lane, but when the driver turns the steering
wheel (e.g. to move farther away from a large vehicle in
an adjacent lane) the system will reduce its control and
enter "co-steering" mode. While in co-steering mode,
the system will provide reduced assistance and allow
the driver to control the path of the vehicle. Once the
driver stops providing input to the steering wheel, the
system will require a few seconds to fully resume lane
centering assistance, especially during curves.
Traffic Signs Recognized
1 — Current Speed Limit With Supplemental Informa-
tion (School Zone)
2 — Next Speed Limit Detected
3 — No Passing Zone Detected
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
4
Hands-Free Active Driving Assist System — If Equipped
The Hands-Free ADA system uses sensors within the
steering wheel and a driver monitoring camera located
on top of the steering column to monitor driver atten-
tiveness. The Hands-Free ADA system allows the driver
to remove their hands from the steering wheel when
engaged, but requires that the driver continue to pay
attention to the road.
The Hands-Free ADA system will also change lanes
when a turn signal is activated if the adjacent lane in
the direction indicated is clear of another vehicle, and
lane markings are detected (noted by a dashed line in
the direction of the available lane change). The system
uses sensors, including Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
sensors, to determine if a lane change is possible. If the
assisted lane change is in progress, a green arrow will
appear. If a lane change is requested but the direction
indicated is not possible, a yellow arrow will appear.
Once conditions are clear, the arrow will turn green and
the assisted lane change will begin.
Additionally, Hands-Free ADA will slow the vehicle down
when approaching and going through sharp curves.
WARNING!
The driver is always responsible for determining if a
lane change is safe. Failure to follow this warning can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
Extended Auto Resume
If equipped with Hands-Free ADA and the system brings
your vehicle to a stop while following the vehicle ahead,
your vehicle will automatically resume driving without
driver input when the path in front of the vehicle is clear
and the driver is attentive. The path in front of the
vehicle is determined to be clear based on the forward
facing camera, front radars, and front ultrasonic
sensors.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving after
10 minutes, the Electric Park Brake (EPB) will be
applied and the system will cancel.
NOTE:
•
The Hands-Free Active Driving Assist system is only
available on approved compatible roadways and
requires an active subscription through the
Uconnect Connected Services package. If the ADA
on/off button is pushed without an active subscrip-
tion, the instrument cluster display will show the
message “Active Driving Assist Unavailable Update
Subscription”. Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement for further information.
•
If previously disabled, activating the Hands-Free
Active Driving Assist system will also activate the
Forward Collision Warning and Pedestrian Emer-
gency Braking systems
page 227.
•
If the vehicle is equipped with the Uconnect Con-
nected Services package, additional data may be col-
lected through the Connected Services system. This
includes information about the vehicle’s operation, a
collision involving the vehicle, the use of the vehicle
and its features, and in certain situations, the location
and approximate GPS speed of the vehicle. Refer to
the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for Terms
and Conditions and Privacy Statements.
•
The driver monitoring camera may record images of
the driver during certain crash, or near crash-like
situations. To retrieve the images recorded by the
camera, special equipment is required and access
to the vehicle or the camera is needed.
•
Vehicle data may be read from the Hands-Free ADA
system with special equipment and access to the
vehicle or the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
WARNING!
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be atten-
tive of road traffic, weather conditions, vehicle speed,
distance to the vehicle ahead, position in the lane com-
pared to other vehicles, and brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while driving
to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Some states and local laws may require hands to be
kept on the steering wheel at all times. For vehicles
equipped with the Hands-Free ADA system, ONLY
(Continued)
Assisted Lane Change (Green)
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
remove your hands from the steering wheel if the
Hands-Free system is engaged, it is safe to do so, and
it is permitted by state and local laws.
You should turn off the Active Driving Assist systems:
•
When driving in complex driving situations (e.g.
urban environments, construction zones, etc.),
adverse weather or low visibility conditions (e.g. rain,
snow, fog, sleet, dust), or adverse road conditions
(e.g. heavy traffic, worn or missing lane markings,
etc.).
•
When entering a highway off-ramp.
•
When driving on roads that are icy, snow covered,
or slippery.
•
When driving during difficult or uncertain
conditions.
TURNING ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST
ON OR OFF
To enable the Active Driving Assist system, proceed as
follows:
1. Push the Active Driving Assist on/off button located
on the right side of the steering wheel. The steering
wheel image will display white in the instrument
cluster display until the system is engaged. If ACC
was previously disabled, pushing this button will
activate BOTH ACC and Active Driving Assist
systems.
2. If ACC was engaged before pushing the ADA on/off
button, ACC will remain active and ADA will also
become engaged (once all other conditions are
met).
3. If ACC was not active before pushing the ADA on/off
button, push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release when the desired driving speed is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
4. If desired, adjust the ACC distance setting by push-
ing the Distance Increase or Distance Decrease
buttons.
When all system conditions are met as described in
“System Engagement Conditions” in the next section,
the system will engage and the steering wheel image in
the display will change to green.
NOTE:
•
Along with the color change of the steering wheel
image, the “glow” effect of the instrument cluster
display will also change to green when ADA is
engaged.
•
If equipped with Hands-Free ADA, the light strips in
the driver’s and front passenger’s door panels will
also change to green indicating ADA is engaged.
System Engagement Conditions
The following conditions must be met before the system
will engage:
•
Active Driving Assist system is enabled
•
Driver seat belt is buckled
•
System detects visible lane markings
•
Vehicle is traveling below 90 mph (145 km/h)
•
Vehicle is centered in lane
•
Turn signal is not activated
•
Vehicle is not in a tight curve
•
Trailer is not connected
Active Driving Assist On/Off Button
Active Driving Assist Engaged (Steering Wheel Green)
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
4
•
Driver has hands on steering wheel and is paying
attention to the road
•
If equipped with the Hands-Free system, vehicle is
driving on an approved roadway
•
If equipped with the Hands-Free system, a subscrip-
tion is active and the vehicle is receiving a clear cel-
lular signal
NOTE:
•
For the system to detect the driver’s hands on the
steering wheel, the wheel must be gripped on the
outside. Gripping the inside areas of the steering
wheel will not satisfy the hands-on condition to
engage the system.
•
The chrome strip at the bottom of the steering
wheel may not detect the presence of hands on the
wheel.
System Deactivation
The system will be deactivated in any of the following
situations:
•
If the system has detected driver inattentiveness,
and has gone through all escalation warnings:
○ Base ADA: Hands no longer detected on the
steering wheel
○ Hands-Free ADA: Driver no longer attentive
•
If lane markings are no longer detected or poor road
conditions are experienced
•
If the brake pedal is pressed or ACC system is
deactivated
•
If a turn signal is used when equipped with Base
ADA (unless a target is in the blind spot zone on the
same side the turn signal is being applied)
•
If the driver performs an evasive maneuver, applying
high torque to the steering wheel for a short
duration
•
If the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
•
If the vehicle speed exceeds 90 mph (145 km/h)
•
If the Active Driving Assist on/off button is pushed
again (ADA will turn off)
•
If the driver steers out of the lane and crosses a
lane marking
•
If the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
becomes active and is providing warnings/braking
NOTE:
•
ADA will not enable if the system detects a trailer is
connected to the vehicle.
•
Pushing the Active Driving Assist on/off button will
turn the system off. All other deactivation conditions
will place the system back into the “enabled” state
with the steering wheel indicator displayed in white
until all engagement conditions are met again.
•
When the system is deactivated, the system status
indicator lights will turn off, Active Lane Manage-
ment will return to its previous state, and ACC will
disable or remain engaged pending system
conditions.
Hands-Free System Deactivation (If Equipped)
In addition to the deactivation conditions previously
listed, the Hands-Free ADA system will also deactivate
in the following situations:
•
The system initiates a Stop-In-Lane maneuver to
stop the vehicle due to driver inattentiveness. The
Stop-In-Lane maneuver can be overridden by placing
hands on the steering wheel and applying the accel-
erator or brake pedal. Refer to “Indications On The
Display” in the next section for further information.
•
The vehicle is not receiving a clear cellular signal for
an extended period of time.
•
The subscription for the Hands-Free system is
expired.
•
The vehicle leaves a supported roadway.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
The Active Driving Assist system status can always be
viewed in the instrument cluster display, and status
changes are shown by changes in color of the system’s
indicator lights.
Do Not Grip Inside Of Steering Wheel
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
As the system detects driver inattentiveness as previ-
ously described
page 135, the system status indi-
cator lights will change from green, to yellow, to red.
The following indicators will change in color as warnings
to the driver escalate:
•
Active Driving Assist Indicator (steering wheel icon in
the instrument cluster display or Head Up Display
[if equipped])
•
Glow effect of the instrument cluster display
•
For Hands-Free ADA only, light strips in the driver
and front passenger’s door panels (red and green
only)
For Base ADA, if driver attention is not returned, the
system will deactivate.
For Hands-Free ADA, if driver attention is not returned,
the system will perform a Stop-In-Lane maneuver. Once
the vehicle is at a standstill, the vehicle will be shifted
to PARK and the Electric Park Brake (EPB) will be
applied. Then, the vehicle will attempt to place an emer-
gency call through the Assist and SOS system. If too
many Stop-In-Lane maneuvers are initiated, or if one is
completed, the system will be unavailable until the igni-
tion is cycled OFF, then back to ON.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Off
•
ADA is not turned on/enabled by the driver.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are White
•
ADA is turned on/enabled by the driver, but the sys-
tem is not actively steering and providing speed con-
trol for the vehicle.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Green
•
System is actively steering and providing speed con-
trol for the vehicle and the system detects driver is
attentive.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Yellow
•
Driver inattentiveness has been detected, warning
the driver to place hands on the steering wheel, or
look back toward the road (if equipped with the
Hands-Free system).
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Red
•
Driver inattentiveness is still being detected, or
driver take-over is being requested, warning the
driver to place hands on the steering wheel, or
if equipped with the Hands-Free system, take con-
trol of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For both Base ADA and Hands-Free ADA, the driver
MUST replace hands on the steering wheel and take
control of the vehicle when the system is deactivated.
SYSTEM STATUS
Along with changes in the system’s indicator lights
(green, yellow, and red), the system can also issue sev-
eral accompanying warnings intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate a
potential collision.
Base Active Driving Assist System
•
Two haptic brake jerk warnings will be issued (red
warning light is being issued).
•
A steering wheel vibration warning (if enabled) will
occur if the vehicle crosses a lane marker, for
example, when driving on a tight curve. The steering
wheel vibration feature can be turned on or off
within the Uconnect system
page 179.
Hands-Free Active Driving Assist System
•
A seat vibration warning will occur (red warning light
is being issued).
The driver can take control of the vehicle at anytime to
override the warnings by pressing the gas or brake
pedal, moving the steering wheel, and being attentive
to the road.
SYSTEM OPERATION/LIMITATIONS
WARNING!
Active Driving Assist is an SAE Level 2 Driver Assist
feature, requiring driver attention at all times. To pre-
vent serious injury or death:
•
Always remember that the Active Driving Assist
system is a convenience system that cannot accu-
rately detect all situations. Complete attention is
always required while driving, even when using the
Active Driving Assist system.
(Continued)
Active Driving Assist Cancelled Message
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
4
WARNING!
•
Always remain alert and be ready to take control of
the vehicle in the event that the Active Driving
Assist system deactivates, or otherwise lacks full
functionality as described further before and after
this statement.
•
Always keep your hands on the steering wheel
when the Base Active Driving Assist system is
activated.
•
Always keep your eyes on the road when the
Hands-Free Active Driving Assist system is
activated.
•
Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles and
pay attention to traffic conditions.
•
Do not use a hand held device when either Base,
or Hands-Free Active Driving Assist system is
engaged.
•
Always pay attention to the road when the Hands-
Free Active Driving Assist system is engaged. The
Active Driving Assist system will not steer to avoid
safety hazards, constructions zones, objects, or
road impediments. You need to take control to
steer and brake the vehicle in such situations, and
when merging into traffic, exiting the highway,
making a turn for crossing traffic, or stopping for
traffic control devices.
•
Do not place any objects on the steering wheel
(e.g. steering wheel covers) which could interfere
with the hand detection sensors.
The Base Active Driving Assist and Hands-Free Active
Driving Assist systems DO NOT:
•
Warn or prevent collisions with other vehicles
•
Steer your vehicle around stopped vehicles, slower
vehicles, construction zones or equipment, pedestri-
ans, or animals
•
Respond to traffic lights or stop signs
•
Merge onto highways or exit off-ramps
•
Change lanes (exception: Hands-Free, only when
initiated by the driver)
•
React to cross traffic
NOTE:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a core component of
ADA. For ACC system limitations
page 127.
The Active Driving Assist system may have limited or
reduced functionality when one of the following condi-
tions occur:
•
The vehicle’s radar sensors and/or forward facing
camera is damaged, covered, misaligned, or
obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.)
•
If the suspension alignment is not correct, if the
vehicle is modified (e.g. lifting or lowering the sus-
pension, installing different sized wheels or tires) or
if there has been damage due to road hazards
•
Driving near highway toll booths
NOTE:
If damage to the windshield occurs, have the wind-
shield replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and the front fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle
when backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a park-
ing maneuver). The vehicle brakes may be automati-
cally applied and released when performing a reverse
parking maneuver if the system detects a possible colli-
sion with an obstacle.
NOTE:
•
The driver can disable the automatic braking func-
tion by turning ParkSense off via the ParkSense
switch. The driver can also override automatic brak-
ing by changing the gear or by pressing the gas
pedal over 90% of its capacity during the braking
event.
•
Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle is
in 4WD Low.
•
Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
•
The automatic braking function may only be applied
if the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid
colliding with a detected obstacle.
•
The automatic braking function may not be applied
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear
of the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer Programmable Fea-
tures section of the Uconnect system.
•
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state for the automatic braking function through
ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected
obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
•
The system is designed to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
•
The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle's movements.
For limitations of this system and recommendations,
see
page 146.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is
in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi-
mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased
to less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). A display
warning will appear in the instrument cluster display if
the vehicle is in REVERSE and the speed exceeds
7 mph (11 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia/
bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors located in the
front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front and
behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of
view. The front sensors detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm)
from the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can
detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper.
These distances depend on the location, type and ori-
entation of the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with ParkSense Active Park
Assist, there will be six ParkSense sensors located in
the rear fascia/bumper.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
based on the object’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will produce a
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the dis-
play will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 sec-
ond tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
4
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 11 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arcs
6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 12 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arcs
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERT S FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None
6th
Flashing
5th
Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid
7th
Flashing
6th
Flashing
5th
Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None
6th
Flashing
5th
Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERT S FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on,
when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when
an obstacle has been detected, and the vehicle is
stationary.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Uconnect system
page 179.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
4
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
page 92. It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and
the detected obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING
PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch located on the
switch panel on the forward part of the cen-
ter console, in front of the gear selector.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to enable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the system
state.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately two sec-
onds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display
will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector is
moved to the DRIVE position, no warning message will
be displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch
LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the
ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system requires
service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentar-
ily, and then the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start-up, when the ParkSense System
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and
it will display a pop-up. The pop-up will include up to two
faults. Possible fault messages are "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED.” The pop-up mes-
sage will display for five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the instru-
ment cluster display will display a "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" pop-up message for
five seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will
be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the front or
rear sensor location depending on where the fault is
detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts
for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts
will interrupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SER-
VICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is detected
within the five second pop-up duration. The vehicle
graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS"
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear
of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear,
see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see
an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE
SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of
snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
•
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument clus-
ter will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you
turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
•
When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
•
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
•
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) of
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result
in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed
in the instrument cluster.
•
ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
•
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly be disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
(Continued)
WARNING!
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the vehicle
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Side Distance Warning system detects the pres-
ence of side obstacles near the vehicle using the park-
ing sensors located in the front and rear
fascia/bumpers.
Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be displayed
if this feature is enabled within Uconnect Settings
page 179.
The system warns the driver with an acoustic signal
and, when enabled, with visual indications on the
instrument cluster display.
When the vehicle is in DRIVE, the Side Distance
Warning volume/chime will match the Front ParkSense
volume and chime type.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Side Distance
Warning volume/chime will match the Rear ParkSense
volume and chime type.
WARNING ALERT S
Distance
(inches/cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
12 – 24 inches
(30–60 cm)
Arcs-Left 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Arcs-Right 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
Continuous
Fast audible
chime as the
objects get
close to the
vehicle
Radio Volume
Reduced
Yes Yes
NOTE:
Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio if on
when the system is sounding an audible tone. An
audible tone will only sound if a collision is possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
4
Activation/Deactivation
The system can operate only after driving a short dis-
tance and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and 7 mph
(0 and 11 km/h). The system can be activated/
deactivated via the Settings menu of the Uconnect sys-
tem. If the ParkSense System is deactivated via the
ParkSense hard switch then the Side Distance Warning
system will automatically be deactivated.
Message on the display for Side Distance Warning
feature:
“Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed in the
case of a failure of the Side Distance Warning system
sensors. Free the bumpers of any obstacles, ensure
that the front and rear fascia/bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
“System Not Available” — This message is displayed if
the Side Distance Warning system is not available. The
failed operation of the system might be due to the
insufficient voltage from the battery or other failures on
the electrical system. Contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the electrical system checked.
ParkSense Usage Precautions
Some conditions may influence the performance of the
Side Distance Warning system:
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
•
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
•
When you turn ParkSense off, the message to
appear in the instrument cluster display will read
“PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn
ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
•
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
•
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
•
The presence of a tow hook without a trailer may
interfere with the correct operation of the parking
sensors. Before using the ParkSense system, it is
recommended to remove the removable tow hook
ball assembly and any attachments from the vehicle
when it is not used for towing operations.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
•
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly be disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
(Continued)
WARNING!
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the vehicle
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular park-
ing maneuvers. The system works by identifying a
proper parking space, providing audible/visual instruc-
tions, and controlling the steering wheel only, or the
accelerator, gear selector, brakes, and the steering
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
wheel (if equipped with the Fully Automated system).
Depending on the driver's parking maneuver selection,
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable of
maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular
parking space on either side (i.e., driver side or passen-
ger side).
Two types of ParkSense Active Park Assist systems are
available:
•
Semi-Automatic ParkSense Active Park Assist
•
ParkSense Automated Parking system
Semi-Automatic ParkSense Active Park Assist —
If Equipped
The Semi-Automatic system detects parking spaces,
and controls the steering wheel only. The driver main-
tains control of the accelerator, gear selector and
brakes.
ParkSense Automated Parking — If Equipped
The Fully Automated system detects parking spaces,
and controls the accelerator, gear selector, brakes, and
steering wheel. In this mode, the system also provides
obstacle detection by providing visual and audible warn-
ings and automatic braking to avoid a collision.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Fully Automated sys-
tem, you can switch between Semi-Automatic and Fully
Automated mode in the Uconnect Settings
page 179.
NOTE:
•
The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects,
and must intervene as required.
•
The system is designed to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
•
During a Semi-Automatic or Fully Automated maneu-
ver, if the driver touches the steering wheel after
being instructed to remove their hands from the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the
driver will be required to manually complete the
parking maneuver.
•
The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. envi-
ronmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc.,
or if searching for a parking space that has surfaces
that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
•
New vehicles from the dealer must have at least
30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully cali-
brated and performs accurately. This is due to the
system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the
performance of the feature. The system will also
continuously perform the dynamic vehicle calibra-
tion to account for differences such as over or under
inflated tires and new tires.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch, located
on the switch panel on the forward part of
the center console, in front of the gear selector.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system,
push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once
(LED turns on). Pushing the switch a second time will
disable the system (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
•
Parking maneuver is completed
•
Vehicle speed is greater than 28 mph (45 km/h)
when searching for a parking space during a Fully
Automated maneuver
•
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)
when searching for a parking space during a Semi-
Automatic maneuver
•
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) dur-
ing Semi-Automatic active steering guidance into
the parking space
•
Steering wheel is touched during Fully Automated or
Semi-Automatic active steering guidance into the
parking space
•
The gas pedal or brake pedal is pressed during Fully
Automated active steering guidance into the parking
space
•
ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist switch is
pushed
•
Any of the doors are opened during a Fully Auto-
mated maneuver
•
The driver door is opened during a Semi-Automatic
maneuver
•
Rear liftgate is opened
•
A trailer is connected
•
Vehicle is in 4WD Low
•
Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control, or Active
Driving Assist systems are engaged
•
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking Sys-
tem intervention
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system allows a maxi-
mum number of shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within the maxi-
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
4
mum amount of shifts, the system will cancel and the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to com-
plete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only oper-
ate and search for a parking space when the following
conditions are present:
•
Gear selector is in DRIVE
•
Ignition is in the RUN position
•
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated
•
All of the doors are closed
•
Rear liftgate is closed
•
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h) during
a Semi-Automatic maneuver
•
Vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) during
a Fully Automated maneuver
•
The outer surface and the underside of the front
and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction
NOTE:
•
During a Semi-Automatic maneuver, if the vehicle is
driven above approximately 15 mph (25 km/h), the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to
slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approxi-
mately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel.
The driver must then reactivate the system by push-
ing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
•
During a Fully Automated maneuver, if the vehicle is
driven above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h), the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to
slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approxi-
mately 28 mph (45 km/h), the system will cancel.
The driver must then reactivate the system by push-
ing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily. If any of the pre-
ceding conditions are not present, then the LED will
turn off.
If the vehicle is in any other gear than DRIVE, and an
objected is detected in the vehicle’s path, the system
will default to Parallel Park Exit. A prompt will appear in
the Uconnect display, and the driver will need to select
“Yes” or “No” for a Parallel Park Exit maneuver. Any
other conditions will result in a default to a Parallel
Parking maneuver.
PARKSENSE AUTOMATED PARKING
— IF EQUIPPED
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
enabled, the driver must press “Park” on the Uconnect
display, and the system will begin searching for valid
parallel and perpendicular parking spaces.
NOTE:
•
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and
clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles,
etc.).
•
The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and
free/clear of anything that may be overhanging or
protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tail-
gates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
•
When searching for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
•
While the vehicle is in DRIVE, there will be a full
screen image in the Uconnect display. If the driver
shifts to REVERSE while searching for a parking
space, a camera image will appear in the Uconnect
display with a “Shift To Drive” message.
Both types of valid spaces (parallel and perpendicular)
will be displayed in the Uconnect display as they are
found. The available spaces will update in real time.
When valid parking spaces have been found, the driver
will be prompted to stop the vehicle.
The driver can then select a parking space by pressing
the desired space on the Uconnect display.
NOTE:
If a space selection is attempted before the vehicle is
stopped, a warning screen will appear in the Uconnect
display with instructions to stop the vehicle to make a
selection.
If the driver selects a perpendicular parking space, the
system will prompt the driver to choose a Forward or
Reverse parking method.
Select A Space
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
You can press the “Back” button on the display to
return to the parking space selection screen and select
a different space.
Once the parallel or perpendicular parking maneuver
selection has been made, a message will appear in the
display with instructions to hold down the brake pedal
and Active Park Assist switch. Both of these conditions
must be met in order to begin the parking maneuver.
The message also instructs the driver to push and hold
the Active Park Assist switch for the entire maneuver.
NOTE:
When the Active Park Assist switch is held down, the
turn signal for the side of the vehicle where the
selected parking space is located will turn on
automatically.
The system will then instruct the driver to remove
hands from the steering wheel and feet from the ped-
als. This screen will be shown for a minimum of two
seconds, or until the driver releases the brake pedal.
When the parking sequence is initiated by the driver
after the previously described conditions are met, the
Uconnect system will display a Top View along with
either a rear camera view (if the vehicle is placed in
REVERSE) or a forward camera view (if the vehicle is
placed in DRIVE).
The Top View will have integrated ParkSense arcs in the
image at the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will
change color from yellow to red corresponding the dis-
tance zones to the oncoming object.
The system will then perform the parking maneuver.
Once the maneuver is complete, the vehicle will auto-
matically shift into PARK.
The system will display a “Complete!” message and
instruct the driver to release the Active Park Assist switch.
Once the Active Park Assist switch is released, a chime
will sound and the LED on the switch will turn off. After
approximately five seconds, the previous Uconnect screen
will display.
NOTE:
•
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their sur-
roundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is
required.
•
When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should
check their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
•
The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 28 mph (45 km/h) during active
steering guidance into the parking space. The sys-
tem will provide a warning to the driver at 28 mph
(40 km/h) that tells them to slow down. The driver is
then responsible for completing the maneuver if the
system is canceled.
•
If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel
or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system.
Always check carefully behind and in front of your
vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up and moving forward. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention
to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
•
Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist sys-
tem, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or dam-
age to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear
fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the
ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on
its size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors will
not be detected when they are in close proximity.
(Continued)
Choose Perpendicular Parking Method
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
4
CAUTION!
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected.
It is recommended that the driver looks over his/
her shoulder when using the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system.
Parallel Park Exit
Enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system by
pressing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch. To
initiate a parking space exit maneuver, the vehicle must
be stopped, and the driver must press “Exit” on the
Uconnect display.
After the driver chooses a parallel park exit maneuver,
the system will then prompt the driver to choose an exit
method. The exit method options are Forward Left and
Forward Right.
NOTE:
If an exit method selection is attempted before the
vehicle is stopped, the driver will be instructed to stop
the vehicle to make a selection.
After the driver chooses a parallel exit side, a message
appears in the Uconnect display with instructions to
hold the brake pedal and hold down the Active Park
Assist switch. Both of these conditions must be met
before the maneuver can begin.
When the Active Park Assist switch is held down, the
turn signal for the chosen exit side will turn on
automatically.
The system will then instruct the driver to remove
hands from the steering wheel and feet from the ped-
als. This screen will be shown for a minimum of two
seconds, or until the driver releases the brake pedal.
When the exit sequence is initiated by the driver after
the previously described conditions are met, the
Uconnect system will display a Top View along with
either a rear camera view (if the vehicle is placed in
REVERSE) or a forward camera view (if the vehicle is
placed in DRIVE), and the exit maneuver will begin.
The Top View will have integrated ParkSense arcs in the
image at the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will
change color from yellow to red corresponding the dis-
tance zones to the oncoming object.
The automatic maneuver ends when the vehicle is clear
of the parking space, and the display shows the mes-
sage of a completed maneuver. The vehicle will be in
DRIVE and held hydraulically by the brakes until the
driver presses the accelerator pedal. The system gives
vehicle control back to the driver.
Once the driver regains control of the vehicle, a chime
will sound and the LED on the switch will turn off. After
approximately five seconds, the previous Uconnect
screen will display.
Parking Maneuver Paused/Canceled
Certain conditions can pause or cancel a Fully Auto-
mated park or exit maneuver.
The ParkSense Automated Parking system can be
paused due to the driver’s finger being removed from
the Active Park Assist switch and/or an object in the
vehicle’s path during a parking maneuver.
If one or more of these scenarios occur, automatic
braking will bring the vehicle to a stop and hold the
vehicle hydraulically by the brakes.
The driver will be instructed to hold the Active Park
Assist switch to continue the park or exit maneuver. If
the driver does not resume holding the switch down,
the maneuver will cancel.
If the maneuver is paused due to an object in the vehi-
cle’s path, a message will appear in the Uconnect dis-
play. The maneuver will remain paused until the object
is no longer in the vehicle’s path.
The system can also be paused before the Active Park
Assist switch is held down if the driver shifts into
REVERSE.
The driver will be instructed to shift to DRIVE to con-
tinue the maneuver. If the vehicle is shifted into DRIVE,
the process will continue on to the seek/maneuver
selection phase.
Choose Exit Method
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
SEMI-AUTOMATIC PARKSENSE
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
enabled, the driver must press “Park” on the Uconnect
display, and the system will begin searching for valid
parallel and perpendicular parking spaces.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Fully Automated sys-
tem, you may have to update your selected setting in
the Uconnect system to switch to a Semi-Automatic
maneuver
page 179.
NOTE:
•
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and
clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles,
etc.).
•
The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and
free/clear of anything that may be overhanging or
protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tail-
gates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
•
When searching for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending
on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as
possible.
•
While the vehicle is in DRIVE, there will be a full
screen image in the Uconnect display. If the driver
shifts to REVERSE while searching for a parking
space, a camera image will appear in the Uconnect
display with a “Shift To Drive” message.
Both types of valid spaces (parallel and perpendicular)
will be displayed in the Uconnect display as they are
found. The available spaces will update in real time.
When valid parking spaces have been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular or
parallel parking sequence (depending on the type of
maneuver being performed).
A chime will sound, and the driver will be instructed to
stop the vehicle and to select a space. This can be
done by pressing the desired space on the Uconnect
display.
If the driver selects a perpendicular parking space, the
system will prompt the driver to choose a Forward or
Reverse parking method.
After a parking space has been selected, the driver will
be instructed to remove hands from the steering wheel
and shift into REVERSE.
Once active steering begins, a camera image will
appear in the Uconnect display with instructions that
will display for the duration of the maneuver.
Select A Space
Choose Perpendicular Parking Method
Remove Hands From Wheel And Shift To Reverse
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
4
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete before then instructing to check
the vehicle’s surroundings, and move backward.
Several more gear shifts (DRIVE and REVERSE) while
keeping hands off of the steering wheel will be
instructed to the driver while checking the vehicle’s
surroundings before completing the parking maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the maneu-
ver is complete and the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle's parking position, then shift the
vehicle into PARK. The message “Complete! Check
Parking Position” will be displayed momentarily.
NOTE:
•
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their sur-
roundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is
required.
•
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the Semi-Automatic parking
maneuver.
•
When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should
check their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
•
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed
within eight shifts, the system will cancel and the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to
complete the maneuver manually.
•
The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h) during active
steering guidance into the parking space. The sys-
tem will provide a warning to the driver at 15 mph
(25 km/h) that tells them to slow down. The driver is
then responsible for completing the maneuver if the
system is canceled.
•
If the system is canceled during the maneuver for
any reason, the driver must take control of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel
or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system.
Always check carefully behind and in front of your
vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up and moving forward. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention
to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
•
Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist sys-
tem, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected
(Continued)
WARNING!
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or dam-
age to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear
fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the
ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on
its size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors will
not be detected when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected.
It is recommended that the driver looks over his/
her shoulder when using the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system.
Parallel Park Exit
Enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system by
pressing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch. To
initiate a parking space exit maneuver, the vehicle must
be stopped, and the driver must press “Exit” on the
Uconnect display.
Move Backward
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
After the driver chooses a parallel park exit maneuver,
the system will then prompt the driver to choose an exit
method. The exit method options are Forward Left and
Forward Right.
After an exit maneuver method has been selected, the
driver will be instructed to remove hands from the steer-
ing wheel and shift into REVERSE.
Release the steering wheel and use the brake and
accelerator pedals and gear selector as instructed,
while the system handles the steering automatically for
exiting the parking space. If the driver touches or holds
the steering wheel (voluntarily or not) during the exit
maneuver, the maneuver will be interrupted.
The Semi-Automatic maneuver ends when the display
shows the message of a completed maneuver. At the
end of the maneuver, the system gives vehicle control
back to the driver.
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT
OPERATION
The Active Lane Management (ALM) system uses a for-
ward facing camera to detect lane markings or road
edges and to measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries. It also uses the Blind Spot Monitoring sen-
sors to detect vehicles in adjacent lanes while your
vehicle is preparing to change lanes.
The system is operational at speeds above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
When both lane markings are detected, and the vehicle
approaches the lane marker (no turn signal applied),
the Active Lane Management system provides a visual
warning in the instrument cluster, as well as a steering
assist torque (if configured in Uconnect Settings), to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
If the driver continues to drift out of the lane, the sys-
tem provides a flashing visual warning through the
instrument cluster display as well as a haptic steering
wheel vibration (if configured in Uconnect Settings)
when the vehicle crosses the lane boundary.
The warning will be in the form of a vibration in the
steering wheel, and/or automatic steering assistance to
direct the vehicle back toward the center of the lane.
When both lane markings are detected, and the driver
uses the turn signal to indicate a lane change while the
system detects another vehicle in the Blind Spot Moni-
toring zone on that side of the vehicle, the Active Lane
Management system provides a warning in the form of
steering assist and/or steering vibration (depending on
radio settings) to guide the vehicle back to the center of
the lane.
Depending on the type of warning selected, the system
will either guide the vehicle back to the center of the
lane, provide a vibration in the steering wheel, or both.
NOTE:
For an event where the Active Lane Management sys-
tem is reacting to a target vehicle in the adjacent lane,
the Blind Spot Monitoring indicator LED on the mirror
will flash, and the steering wheel torque will be greater
than for a normal lane departure (no vehicle in adja-
cent lane).
The driver may manually override the steering assist
warning by applying force to the steering wheel at any
time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal
applied), the Active Lane Management system provides
visual warnings through the instrument cluster display
to prompt the driver to remain within the lane. When
only a single lane marking is detected, a vibration
and/or steering assist warning will not be provided.
Choose Exit Method
Remove Hands From Wheel And Shift To Reverse
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
4
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the Active
Lane Management system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides an
audible and visual warning to the driver if removed. The
system will cancel if the driver does not return their
hands to the wheel.
TURNING ACTIVE LANE
MANAGEMENT ON OR OFF
The Active Lane Management button is
located on the switch panel on the forward
part of the center console, in front of the
gear selector.
To turn the system on, push the Active Lane Manage-
ment button (LED turns off). A message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
To turn the system off, push the button again (LED
turns on).
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition cycle when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT
WARNING MESSAGE
The Active Lane Management system will indicate the
current lane drift condition through the instrument clus-
ter display.
When the system is on, the lane lines are gray when
both of the lane boundaries have not been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
•
When the system is on and only the left lane mark-
ing has been detected, and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display and a vibration and/or steering assist
warning in the steering wheel if a lane departure
occurs, the left lane line will be green.
•
When the system senses the lane line has been
approached (but not crossed), the left lane line will
change to solid yellow and the system will provide
haptic steering wheel vibration and/or steering
assist torque (if programmed in Uconnect Settings).
•
When the system senses the lane line is being
crossed, the left lane line will change to flashing
yellow.
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system operates with
similar behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
•
When the system is on, the lane lines turn from gray
to green to indicate that both of the lane markings
have been detected. When both lane markings have
been detected, the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display and a
vibration and/or steering assist warning in the steer-
ing wheel if a lane departure occurs.
System On (Gray Lines) Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
When the system senses a lane drift situation, the
left lane line turns solid yellow. At this time, steering
assist warning is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
•
When the system senses the lane line is being
crossed, the left lane line changes from solid yellow
to flashing yellow (on/off). At this time, vibration is
applied to the steering wheel.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE:
•
The Active Lane Management system operates with
similar behavior for a right lane departure.
•
If the turn signal is activated, and the vehicle begins
to depart the lane at the same time the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) system detects another vehicle in
the BSM zones, the system will provide haptic steer-
ing wheel vibration and/or steering assist torque (if
programmed in Uconnect Settings).
CHANGING ACTIVE LANE
MANAGEMENT STATUS
Configurable settings for the Active Lane Management
system are available within the Uconnect system
page 179.
Selectable Warning Types:
•
Vibration Only
•
Steering Assist Only
•
Vibration And Steering Assist
Other configurable settings for this system are for the
intensity of the vibration (high/med/low), steering
assist warning (hi/med/low), and the warning zone sen-
sitivity (early/medium/late).
NOTE:
•
The system will not apply vibration and/or steering
assist to the steering wheel whenever a safety sys-
tem engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward Colli-
sion Warning, etc.).
•
The Blind Spot Monitoring system will be forced on
when the ALM system is enabled.
•
The ALM system will be suppressed when the Active
Driving Assist system (if equipped) is engaged.
Lanes Sensed (Green Lines)
Lane Drift (Solid Yellow Line)
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
4
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back
Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the
gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “Check Entire Sur-
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec-
onds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited
and the previous screen appears.
Manual Activation Of The Back Up Camera
1. Press the Vehicle button located on the bottom of
the Uconnect display and then select the Controls
menu.
2. Press the Back Up Camera icon to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
NOTE:
•
The Rear View camera can also be turned on manu-
ally through the Apps menu within the Uconnect
system.
•
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect system
page 179.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited
and the previous screen appears. When the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned on,
the camera image will continue to be displayed for up
to 10 seconds unless the following conditions occur:
the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is
placed in the OFF position, or the touchscreen X button
to disable the display of the Rear View Camera is
pressed.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its pro-
jected back up path based on the steering wheel posi-
tion. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
hitch/receiver. Different colored zones indicate the dis-
tance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0-1ft(0-30cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Rear Camera Washer
When the rear window washer is activated by pushing
the windshield wiper/washer lever forward, the
ParkView Rear Back Up and Digital Rearview Mirror
(if equipped) cameras are also washed. For more infor-
mation, see
page 61.
ZOOM VIEW
When the Rear View Camera image is being
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below
8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear selector
position, Zoom View is available. By pressing
the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the dis-
play screen, the image will zoom in to four times the
standard view. Pressing the icon a second time will
return the view to the standard Back Up Camera
display.
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE,
the Zoom View selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until
the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and
speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the icon
will appear gray.
•
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
VIEWING AT SPEED
When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL or
DRIVE, the Rear View Camera can be acti-
vated with the Back Up Camera button in the
Controls menu. This feature allows the cus-
tomer to monitor the area directly behind the vehicle (or
trailer, if equipped) for up to 10 seconds while driving. If
the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the
Rear View Camera image will be displayed continuously
until deactivated via the touchscreen X button.
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The FamCam system consists of an interior monitoring
camera mounted on the headliner that allows the driver
to view cargo/passengers in the rear interior of the
vehicle through the Uconnect screen.
To activate the feature, press the FamCam
button in the Controls tab of the Vehicle
menu. The FamCam feature can also be
accessed from the App Drawer, or the status
bar at the top of the Uconnect display.
The display will show the entire view inside the vehicle
on the left side of the screen, and will show a
zoomed-in view of the selected seat on the right side of
the screen.
To change the seat shown in the zoomed-in view, press
a different seat location on the left side of the display.
The zoomed-in view will then show the new seat loca-
tion. By default, the second row driver’s side seat will
be displayed in the zoomed-in view.
The display will appear in color in well lit conditions and
will appear black and white in low light conditions.
If the driver shifts into REVERSE or presses the touch-
screen X button, the view will close. Otherwise, the
FamCam view will remain on the display.
NOTE:
When FamCam is turned off, the selected seat in the
zoomed-in view on the right side of the display will be
retained. The next time the feature is activated, the
same seat will be shown in the zoomed-in view.
NIGHT VISION CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Night Vision Cam-
era system which uses an infrared camera to view the
area ahead of the vehicle, beyond the headlights, to
detect people and large animals when it is dark
outside.
The system detects pedestrians or large animals by
measuring the temperature difference between the
object and the surrounding area.
The thermal objects detected by the camera can be
displayed in the instrument cluster display. Scroll to the
Night Vision page in the instrument cluster display
menu
page 96 to display the Night Vision screen.
Warm objects (e.g. animals) will appear lighter on the
display while cold objects (e.g. traffic signs) will appear
darker.
NOTE:
•
Night Vision only shows objects of interest that are
warmer or colder than the surroundings.
•
Adjust the instrument cluster dimmer control bright-
ness to make the image appear brighter or dimmer.
FamCam Display Example (7 Passenger Vehicle Shown)
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
4
To exit out of the Night Vision screen, select a different
menu in the instrument cluster display.
A yellow or red border and box highlight will appear
around objects of interest. More than one object of
interest may be highlighted.
The highlighting of the object(s) of interest will update
in real time based upon the current Night Vision
assessment.
The Night Vision system display can be deactivated
under certain conditions. See
page 159 for further
information.
The two categories of Night Vision warnings are Pedes-
trian Warnings and Animal Warnings.
Pedestrian Warning Telltale
Animal Warning Telltale
A Pedestrian or Animal Warning is considered either
Level 1 or Level 2. Level 1 warnings are yellow, and
Level 2 warnings are red. The colors are not
configurable.
Level 1 Warnings:
•
Yellow telltale in the instrument cluster display
•
Yellow highlights around the detected
pedestrian/animal
•
Occurs when the vehicle is moving at speeds
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h) and the target is in or
approaching the vehicle path
Level 2 Warnings:
•
Red telltale in the instrument cluster display
•
Red highlights around the detected
pedestrian/animal
•
Occurs when the vehicle is moving at speeds
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h) and a collision with
the detected pedestrian/animal is possible
•
The pedestrian/animal is directly in the vehicle
path, close to the headlight area
•
A video pop-up will display when there is a target
detected and the instrument cluster display is not
showing the Night Vision page
•
A chime will sound for a Level 2 Warning detection
event
Only one telltale can be displayed at a time based upon
priority.
The priority order of the warnings from highest to lowest
is:
1. Pedestrian Warning Level 2
2. Animal Warning Level 2
3. Pedestrian Warning Level 1
4. Animal Warning Level 1
Level 2 Warnings may display in the Head Up Display
(if equipped).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is stopped, or slowing down, all Level
2 warnings become Level 1 warnings.
You can enable or disable the warnings within the
Uconnect system
page 179.
If the warnings are off, the telltales, chimes, and
warning messages will all be off. Pedestrians and ani-
mals can still be detected by the system, but there will
be no warnings.
The Night Vision alert status telltale will be
gray when the warnings are suppressed. The
telltale will also turn gray to indicate that the
alerts are suppressed due to environmental
factors (e.g. daylight hours, external temperature is
greater than 86°F (30°C)) or if the gear selector is in
REVERSE. When the Night Vision alerts are active, the
telltale will be green
page 100.
Highlight Around Objects Of Interest
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
Camera Washers
When the front window washer is activated, the Night
Vision camera will also be washed
page 60.
WARNING!
•
Do not jerk the steering wheel in response to a
warning.
•
Never attempt to swerve around animals if doing
so would endanger you or others.
•
Do not stare at the image while driving. You could
crash and you or others could be injured.
•
The Night Vision system only provides alerts to
objects of interest and cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment. The warnings are
meant to direct your attention to the detected
objects, but the Night Vision system does not auto-
matically brake the vehicle and may not provide a
warning with enough time to help avoid a crash.
•
Warnings are only provided if a pedestrian or large
animal is detected by the system.
•
It is always the driver’s responsibility to be atten-
tive of road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead, and
most importantly, brake operation, to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
DETECTION RANGE
The system can detect people 4 ft (1.25 m) tall or
greater in the upright position. The system can also
detect animals that are four-legged and 3 ft (1 m) tall or
greater in the upright position.
The detection distance for the system is between 26 ft
(8 m) and 328 ft (100 m) from the front of the vehicle.
The system may not be able to detect pedestrians or
animals in the following situations:
•
Pedestrian/animal is outside of the detection range
•
Pedestrian/animal is fully or partially covered
•
Pedestrian/animal does not reach the minimum
detection height
NOTE:
Other objects on the road that meet the height/shape/
temperature (e.g. sun exposure) of pedestrians/
animals may be detected and classified as targets.
WARNING!
•
Night Vision can only detect pedestrians/animals
located within the range of the infrared camera.
•
Night Vision will not detect pedestrians/animals in
brightly lit conditions.
•
Night Vision may not detect pedestrians/animals
and highlight them if:
○ The pedestrians/animals are not in an upright
position, for example if they are sitting or lying
down, or if the pedestrian is riding a bicycle.
○ The pedestrian/animal in the display appears
incomplete, for example because the
pedestrian/animal is partially behind a vehicle.
○ The pedestrian/animal is not directly ahead in
the coverage area.
○ The pedestrian/animal is part of a group.
○
The pedestrian is wearing certain types of clothing.
○ The pedestrian/animal is moving too quickly
through the field of view.
○ The sensor is blocked by dirt, rain, snow, or ice.
SERVICE THE NIGHT VISION
SYSTEM
When service conditions are present, the following fault
messages may appear in the instrument cluster display
when the vehicle is placed in the ON position.
If "Night Vision Unavailable Sensor Blocked" appears in
the instrument cluster display, make sure the camera is
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other debris. The camera
is located in the upper fascia/bumper, inside the driver
side grille slot. Clean the camera using a soft wet cloth
or by pressing the Clean Camera button in the
Uconnect system. If the message continues to appear
after cycling the ignition, see an authorized dealer.
If “Night Vision Temporarily Unavailable” or “Night
Vision Unavailable Service Required" appears in the
instrument cluster display after cycling the ignition, see
an authorized dealer.
The camera must be properly aligned to work correctly.
If the camera needs adjustment, see an authorized
dealer. Do not attempt to adjust the camera yourself.
NOTE:
Alignment and performance of the Night Vision may be
affected by aftermarket modifications. Mopar® parts
should be used to get the optimal performance of this
system.
NIGHT VISION SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
The Night Vision display is deactivated under the follow-
ing conditions:
•
Vehicle is shifted into REVERSE
•
The ignition is not in the ON/RUN position
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
4
•
The headlights are off and the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h)
The Night Vision display warnings are suppressed under
the following conditions:
•
Daylight hours
•
Temperatures above 86°F (30°C)
The system may not be fully functional in the following
situations:
•
On steep hills
•
On tight curves of the road
•
If the camera/sensor is damaged or blocked by dirt,
snow, ice, or other debris
•
In poor visibility conditions such as heavy fog, rain,
snow, or other weather conditions
•
If the vehicle has been modified with aftermarket
parts and/or accessories
NOTE:
If any of these conditions are present, the system does
not need service.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Camera system that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the surroundings and Top View of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a
different view is selected through the touchscreen but-
tons. The Top View of the vehicle will show which doors
are open. The image will be displayed on the touch-
screen display along with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround View
Camera system is comprised of four sequential cam-
eras located in the front grille, rear liftgate and side
mirrors.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera system has programmable
settings that may be selected through the Uconnect
system
page 179.
Press this button on the touchscreen to
enter the Surround View Camera menu in
the Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE,
the Rear View or Top View is the default view of the
system.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned on, the camera image will continue to
be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted
into PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
There is a touchscreen X button to disable the display
of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned off, the Surround View Camera mode
is exited and the last known screen appears again.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including
the side view mirrors and its projected back up path
based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear
of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0-1ft(0-30cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
Modes Of Operation
Manual activation of the Surround View Camera is
selected by pressing the Surround View Camera button
located in the Controls menu within the Uconnect system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
Rear View or Front View in a split screen display. There
is integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front,
rear, and if equipped, the sides of the vehicle. The arcs
will change color from yellow to red corresponding to
the distance zones to the oncoming object.
Surround View Camera View
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
Front tires will be in image when the tires are turned.
•
Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the image
may appear distorted.
•
Top View will show which doors are open.
•
Open front doors and/or liftgate will cancel outside
image.
TopViewPlusRearView
This is the default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the Top
View of the vehicle with optional active guide-
lines for the projected path when enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path button will give
the driver a wider angle view of the rear cam-
era system. The Top View will be disabled
when this is selected.
TopViewPlusFrontView
The Front View will show you what is immedi-
ately in front of the vehicle and is always
paired with the Top View of the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path button will give
the driver a wider angle view of the front
camera system. The Top View will be dis-
abled when this is selected.
Back Up Camera View
Pressing the Back Up Camera button will
provide a full screen rear view with Zoom
View.
NOTE:
If the Rear View Camera view was selected through the
Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of the Rear
View screen will return to the Surround View Camera
menu. If the Back Up Camera was manually activated
through the Controls menu of the Uconnect system,
exiting out of the display screen will return to the Con-
trols menu.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated under the following
conditions:
•
The speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph
(13 km/h).
•
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
•
The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE and
the touchscreen X button is pressed.
•
The camera delay system is turned off manually
through Uconnect Settings
page 179.
Camera Washers
When the rear window washer is activated, the
ParkView Rear Back Up and Digital Rearview Mirror
(if equipped) cameras are also washed
page 61.
When the front window washer is activated, the front
cameras will also be washed
page 60.
NOTE:
•
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up
on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lenses.
•
If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Surround View Camera. Always check care-
fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should
only be used as a parking aid. The Surround View
camera is unable to view every obstacle or object
in your drive path.
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Surround View to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is rec-
ommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using Surround View.
ZOOM VIEW
When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed,
and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while
in any gear selector position, Zoom View is available.
By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in
the upper left of the display screen, the
image will zoom in to two times the standard
view.
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
4
Pressing the icon a second time will return
the view to the standard Back Up Camera
display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE,
the Zoom View selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until
the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and
speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the icon
will appear gray.
•
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Ensure that the vehicle doors are unlocked as this
unlocks the fuel door.
2. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the outer
edge of the fuel door near the center to unlatch.
Then use a finger to rotate the door to the full open
position.
NOTE:
○
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push
around the perimeter of the fuel door to break
the ice buildup.
○
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors
inside the pipe seal the system.
○
Fuel door will lock when the vehicle is locked.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper doors while
refueling.
NOTE:
Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches allow-
ing the flapper doors to open.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
5. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Engage the fuel door latch by pushing on the outer
edge near the center.
NOTE:
For further information on fuel requirements see
page 331.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to turn on.
(Continued)
Fuel Filler Door Fuel Filler
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
EMERGENCY FUEL FILLER DOOR
RELEASE
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the
fuel filler door emergency release.
1. Gently pry up on the rear edge of the fuel door to
allow finger access.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the body side and paint.
2. With fingers under the edge, pull firmly on the door
to separate the two piece tappet and open the door.
NOTE:
Once this has been done, the two piece tappet fea-
ture that was separated will need be replaced at
your authorized dealer.
VEHICLE LOADING
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR.
PAYLOAD
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
weight a vehicle can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING
(GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the
cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not
exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR or GAWR.
TIRE SIZE
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label repre-
sents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement
tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
RIM SIZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
INFLATION PRESSURE
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle
for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Fuel Door
Fuel Door Open
1 — Two Piece Tappet
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
4
CURB WEIGHT
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle
fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants
or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo
are added.
LOADING
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be deter-
mined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for
operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been
exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the
vehicle should then be determined separately to be
sure that the load is properly distributed over the front
and rear axles. Weighing the vehicle may show that the
GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the specified
GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or
rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight
limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low
and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
NOTE:
•
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
•
Air suspension vehicle may limit off-road heights if
loaded beyond recommended values for vehicle
GVWR and GAWR.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or
the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control.
Overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cover-
age, follow the requirements and recommendations in
this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR
page 163.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) or
more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you
use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating
(GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and
rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR
page 163.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose con-
trol of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load
on your vehicle.
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by
the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can
be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer
tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associ-
ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel
brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to
eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball
or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These
kinds of hitches are used to tow small and medium
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing Hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering
more consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/
hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by
traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a
weight-distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recom-
mended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be
required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted Weight-Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
•
Weight-Distributing Hitch systems may not be com-
patible with surge brake couplers. Consult with
your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable
Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional
information.
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
ADJUSTMENT — QUADRA-LIFT AIR SUSPEN-
SION EQUIPPED VEHICLES
1. Verify that the vehicle is at the Normal Ride Height.
NOTE:
The vehicle must remain in the RUN position with all
doors closed while attaching a trailer for proper lev-
eling of the air suspension system.
2. Position the vehicle on a level surface in preparation
to connect to the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
3. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspen-
sion, use the touchscreen radio settings to enable
Tire/Jack mode. Tire/Jack mode will be canceled
and the procedure must be restarted if the vehicle
is driven at speeds above 5 mph (8 km/h). When
towing, the automatic Entry/Exit feature may be dis-
abled through the Uconnect Touchscreen Radio to
prevent vehicle and trailer movement when gear
selector is moved to PARK.
4. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height
H1.
5. Attach the loaded trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
6. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height
H2.
7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight-
distributing bars per the manufacturers’ recommen-
dations so that the height of the front fender is
approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about 1/2 the differ-
ence between H2 and H1 above normal ride height
[H1]).
Measuring Height (H)
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
4
8. Use the touchscreen radio settings and switch off
Tire/Jack mode. Make sure the vehicle returns to
Normal Ride Height. Perform a visual inspection of
the trailer and weight-distributing hitch to confirm
the manufacturers’ recommendations have been
met.
9. The vehicle can now be driven.
Measurement Example Example Height (mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/2 10.5
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 935.5
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with
TOW/HAUL mode engaged (if equipped).
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
ADJUSTMENT — NON-AIR SUSPENSION
EQUIPPED VEHICLES
1. Verify that the vehicle is at the normal ride height.
2. Position the vehicle on a level surface in preparation
to connect to the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
3. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height
H1.
4. Attach the loaded trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
5. Ensure the trailer is properly secured to the hitch,
including the safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls.
6. Cautiously drive the vehicle and trailer at
20-25 mph (30-40 km/h) for approximately 3 miles
(5 km) to re-level the suspension.
7. Park the vehicle and trailer on a level surface.
8. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height
H2.
9. Install and adjust the tension in the weight-
distributing bars per the manufacturers’ recommen-
dations so that the height of the front fender is
approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about 1/2 the differ-
ence between H2 and H1 above normal ride height
[H1]).
10. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and
weight-distributing hitch to confirm the manufac-
turers’ recommendations have been met.
11. The vehicle can now be driven.
Measurement Example Example Height (mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/2 10.5
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 935.5
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with
TOW/HAUL mode engaged (if equipped).
Measuring Height (H)
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Engine Model GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum TW
3.0L High Output 4x2
12,300 lb
(5,579 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 5,850 lb (2,653 kg) 585 lb (265 kg)
3.0L High Output 4x2 Max Tow
16,500 lb
(7,484 kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m)
10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
1,000 lb (454 kg)
3.0L High Output 4x4
12,300 lb
(5,579 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 5,630 lb (2,553 kg) 563 lb (255 kg)
3.0L High Output 4x4 Max Tow
16,500 lb
(7,484 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 9,840 lb (4,463 kg) 984 lb (446 kg)
5.7L
4x2 Series 3
(3.21 Axle Ratio)
13,700 lb
(6,214 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 7,400 lb (3,356 kg) 740 lb (335 kg)
5.7L
4x2 Series 3
(3.92 Axle Ratio)
15,000 lb
(6,803 kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m)
10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
1,000 lb (454 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
4
Engine Model GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum TW
5.7L
4x2 Series 2
(3.21 Axle Ratio)
15,000 lb
(6,803 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 8,790 lb (3,987 kg) 879 lb (398 kg)
5.7L
4x2 Series 2
(3.92 Axle Ratio)
16,600 lb
(7,529 kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m)
10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
1,000 lb (454 kg)
5.7L
4x4 Series 1
(3.21 Axle Ratio)
13,700 lb
(6,214 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 7,180 lb (3,256 kg) 718 lb (325 kg)
5.7L
4x4 Series 1
(3.92 Axle Ratio)
15,000 lb
(6,803 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 8,480 lb (3,846 kg) 848 lb (386 kg)
5.7L
4x4 Series 2
(3.21 Axle Ratio)
13,700 lb
(6,214 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 7,170 lb (3,252 kg) 717 lb (325 kg)
5.7L
4x4 Series 2
(3.92 Axle Ratio)
16,600 lb
(7,529 kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m)
10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
1,000 lb (454 kg)
5.7L
4x4 Series 3
(3.21 Axle Ratio)
13,700 lb
(6,214 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 7,170 lb (3,252 kg) 717 lb (325 kg)
5.7L
4x4 Series 3
(3.92 Axle Ratio)
15,000 lb
(6,803 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 8,470 lb (3,841 kg) 847 lb (384 kg)
6.4L 4x2
15,000 lb
(6,803 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 8,450 lb (3,832 kg) 845 lb (383 kg)
6.4L 4x2 Max Tow
16,600 lb
(7,529 kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m)
10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
1,000 lb (454 kg)
6.4L 4x4
15,000 lb
(6,803 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 8,260 lb (3,746 kg) 826 lb (374 kg)
6.4L 4x4 Max Tow
16,600 lb
(7,529 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 9,860 lb (4,472 kg) 986 lb (447 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH RECEIVER COVER
REMOVAL — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch
receiver cover, this must be removed to access the
trailer hitch receiver. This cover is located at the bottom
center of the rear fascia/bumper.
1. Turn the three locking retainers located at the bot-
tom of the hitch receiver cover a quarter turn coun-
terclockwise and pull bottom of the hitch receiver
cover outward (towards you).
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you)
then downwards to disengage the tabs located at
the top of the hitch receiver cover to remove.
To reinstall the cover after towing repeat the procedure
in reverse order.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs and fully seat the hitch
receiver cover in the fascia/bumper prior to installation
of the quarter turn fasteners.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
WARNING!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the
front of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the
tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to
sway severely side to side which will cause loss of
control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trail-
ers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
collisions.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information”
placard for the maximum combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo for your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of the new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are
recommended.
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the Scheduled Ser-
vicing
page 278. When towing a trailer, never
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
Weight Distribution
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
4
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as pos-
sible:
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo
that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can
occur that may be difficult for the driver to control.
You could lose control of your vehicle and have a
collision.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause
a loss of control, poor performance or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK (P). For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
○ GVWR
○ GTW
○ GAWR
○ Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
Towing Requirements — Tires
•
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a com-
pact spare tire.
•
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full-size spare tire.
•
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
•
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
•
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
•
For further information page 313.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the
trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and
possible personal injury.
•
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped
with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an
electronic brake controller is not required.
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead
to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
— If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an ITBM for Electric and Electric
Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes. The controller is
located below the instrument panel on the right side of
the steering column.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified with elec-
tric trailer brakes and EOH systems. Some previous
EOH systems may not be compatible with ITBM.
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to acti-
vate power to the trailer's electric brakes independent
of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the manual brake control
lever is activated while the brake is also applied, the
greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to
the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle's brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes
are applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection
status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition
is turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or
sliding the manual brake control lever will display the
GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the Trailer Brake Sta-
tus Indicator Light will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the ITBM, the
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control
power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments.
The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of
10 or decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control
for the specific towing condition and should be changed
as towing conditions change. Changes to towing condi-
tions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions
and weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic free environ-
ment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
condition, functioning normally and properly
adjusted. See a trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connec-
tions according to the trailer manufacturer's
instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged
in, the trailer connected message should appear in
the instrument cluster display (if the connection is
not recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will
not be available), the GAIN setting will illuminate
and the correct type of trailer must be selected from
the instrument cluster display options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel
until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter
“TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the “Trailer
Brake Type” appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or
DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type
appears on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual brake con-
trol lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels
turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point
just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier
trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even
with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument
cluster display. Display messages, along with a single
chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is deter-
mined in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or
on the trailer
page 92.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
4
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss
of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stop-
ping distance or trailer instability which could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss
of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stop-
ping distance or trailer instability which could result in
damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
NOTE:
•
An aftermarket controller may be available for use
with trailers with air or EOH trailer brake systems. To
determine the type of brakes on your trailer and the
availability of controllers, check with your trailer
manufacturer or dealer.
•
Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may
cause damage to the electrical system and elec-
tronic modules of the vehicle. See an authorized
dealer if an aftermarket module is to be installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights
And Wiring
Whenever pulling a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required
for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer con-
nector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
•
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle (or any other device plugged into the vehi-
cle’s electrical connectors) before launching a boat
into water.
•
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing
up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
If equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspension, the auto-
matic Entry/Exit feature may be disabled through the
Uconnect Touchscreen Radio to prevent vehicle and
trailer movement when gear selector is moved to PARK.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control to manually select a lower gear.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2—Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat build-up. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
•
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disen-
gage until you can get back to cruising speed.
•
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads
to maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models With-
out 4WD LOW Range
Four-Wheel Drive Models With
4WD LOW Range
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
•
Transmission in PARK
•
Transfer case in N (Neutral)
•
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
NOTE:
•
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provin-
cial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
•
Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be placed
in Transport Mode before tying them down (from the
body) on a trailer or flatbed truck
page 121. If
the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for
example, engine will not run), tie-downs should be
fastened over the tires using specific straps (not to
the body). Failure to follow these instructions may
cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of
proper tie-down tension.
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
4
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, follow-
ing the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspen-
sion, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride
Height.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmis-
sion into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, follow-
ing the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for tow-
ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight
position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause
severe transmission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
QUADRA-TRAC I (SINGLE-SPEED
TRANSFER CASE) FOUR-WHEEL
DRIVE MODELS
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
not have a N (Neutral) position in the transfer case.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
QUADRA–TRAC II/QUADRA–DRIVE
II FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
The transfer case must be shifted into N (Neutral) and
the transmission must be in PARK (P) for recreational
towing. The N (Neutral) selection button is located by
the selector switch.
CAUTION!
•
DO NOT dolly tow any four-wheel drive vehicle. Tow-
ing with only one set of wheels on the ground (front
or rear) will cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Tow with all four wheels
either ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a
vehicle trailer).
•
Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle
backwards can cause severe damage to the trans-
fer case.
•
The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
•
Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into N (Neutral)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral).
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
•
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the park-
ing brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position dis-
engages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) before recre-
ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground,
with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspen-
sion, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride
Height.
NOTE:
○
Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button, and
must continue to be met until the shift has been
completed. If any of these requirements are not
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button or are
no longer met during the shift, then the N (Neu-
tral) indicator light will flash continuously until all
requirements are met or until the N (Neutral)
button is released.
○
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for
a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place
and no position indicator lights will be on or
flashing.
○
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
○
If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, the engine should be started and
left running for a minimum of 60 seconds (with
all the doors closed) at least once every
24 hours. This process allows the air suspension
to adjust the vehicle’s ride height to compensate
for temperature effects.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and
hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral) button
(located by the selector switch) for five seconds. The
light behind the N symbol will begin to blink red,
indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blink-
ing (stay on solid) when the shift to N (Neutral) is
complete. A “4WD Neutral Warning Vehicle May
Move Even in Park” message will appear in the
instrument cluster.
6. After the shift is completed and the N (Neutral) light
stays on, release the N (Neutral) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the transmis-
sion back into NEUTRAL.
10. Firmly apply the parking brake.
11. With the transmission and transfer case in N (Neu-
tral), push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP but-
ton until the engine turns off.
12. Place the transmission gear selector in PARK.
Release the brake pedal.
13. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice (with-
out pressing the brake pedal), to turn the ignition
to the off position.
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suit-
able tow bar.
15. Release the parking brake.
N (Neutral) Button
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
4
Shifting Out Of N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
NOTE:
○
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button, and
must continue to be met until the shift has been
completed. If any of these requirements are not
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button or are
no longer met during the shift, the N (Neutral)
indicator light will flash continuously until all
requirements are met or until the N (Neutral)
button is released.
○
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for
a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place
and no position indicator lights will be on or
flashing.
○
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and
hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral) button
(located by the selector switch) for two seconds.
7. When the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off,
release the N (Neutral) button. After the N (Neutral)
button has been released, the transfer case will
shift to the position indicated by the selector switch.
8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the engine
off.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE,
release the brake pedal, and check that the
vehicle operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a nar-
rower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds
as conventional passenger cars any more than low-
slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily
in off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of con-
trol or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Quadra-Lift — If Equipped
When off-roading, it is recommended that the lowest
useable vehicle height that will clear the current
obstacle or terrain be selected. The vehicle height
should then be raised as required by the changes in
terrain.
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically change the
vehicle to the optimized height based on the Selec-
Terrain switch position. The vehicle height can be
changed from the default height for each Selec-Terrain
mode by normal use of the air suspension switches
page 119.
N (Neutral) Button
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
When To Use 4WD LOW — If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situa-
tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where addi-
tional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle
speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be
avoided when in 4WD LOW.
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD LOW on dry pavement; driveline
damage may result. 4WD LOW locks front and rear
drivelines together and does not allow for differential
action between the front to rear driveshafts. Driving
in 4WD LOW on pavement will cause driveline bind-
ing; use only on wet or slippery surfaces.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to
20 inches (51 cm) of water, while crossing small rivers
or streams. To maintain optimal performance of your
vehicle's heating and ventilation system it is recom-
mended to switch the system into recirculation mode
during water fording.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driv-
ing through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep
water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-
off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or
the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing water
avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing
water can erode the streambed, causing your vehicle to
sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are
downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 24 inches
(60 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed is 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to ensure the fluids have not been con-
taminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appear-
ance) should be flushed/changed as soon as possible
to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if neces-
sary
page 119. Only shift into a lower gear to main-
tain forward motion. Over-revving the engine can spin
the wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the condi-
tions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use
FIRST gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climb-
ing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine, and
shift into REVERSE (R). Back slowly down the hill, allow-
ing the compression braking of the engine to help regu-
late your speed. If the brakes are required to control
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or
skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or can-
not make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tipping
and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight
down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill
in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
4
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill. Always
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward
motion by turning the front wheels slowly. This may pro-
vide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually pro-
vide traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
When descending mountains or hills, use Hill Descent
Control or Selec-Speed Control to avoid repeated heavy
braking.
If not equipped with Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed
Control use the following procedure:
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly
down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis-
sion whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle
than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it
is always a good idea to check for damage. That way
you can get any problems taken care of right away and
have your vehicle ready when you need it.
•
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension,
and exhaust system for damage.
•
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean
as required.
•
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque
to the values specified in the Service Manual.
•
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide dam-
age to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
•
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes
inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to pre-
vent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
•
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels
for impacted material. Impacted material can cause
a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5/5 NAV
With 10.1-inch Display or Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch
Display system, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes
only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor-
mation. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communica-
tions. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve
over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
WARNING!
•
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into your
vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
•
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
immediately.
NOTE:
•
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a
security breach, vehicle owners should:
○ Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com (US
Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian
Residents) to learn about available Uconnect
software updates.
○ Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located
on the center of the instrument panel. These buttons
allow you to access and change the customer program-
mable features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the instru-
ment panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER con-
trol knob located on the right side. Turn the control
knob to scroll through menus and change settings.
Push the center of the control knob one or more times
to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap
the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s face-
plate for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio.
179
5
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURES
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings tab on
the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available pro-
grammable features.
NOTE:
•
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
•
Press the Open/Close button on the Front Comfort
And Convenience Display to access the fold-out
screen.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the set-
ting is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to the
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The
available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Italiano, Français, and Español.
Display Mode This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it auto-
matically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display bright-
ness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
180 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Display Brightness With Headlights ON This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Theme Mode This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are
“Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto”
changes the theme with the headlights.
Units This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are “Speed” (MPH
or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK],
L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units
of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow you to turn the bottom main category bar labels on or off.
Control Screen Timeout This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five sec-
onds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Message Pop-Ups Displayed with Button Press This setting will turn message notifications on or off.
Ready To Drive Pop-ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
MULTIMEDIA 181
5
Entertainment Screens
When the Entertainment Screens button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s Entertainment system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Passenger Screen Permissions This setting will enable or disable Passenger Screen permissions. The options within
this setting are “Navigation”, “Device Manager”, and “Uconnect Theater” all with “On”
and “Off” options.
Rear Seat Screen Permissions This setting will enable or disable your Rear Seat Screen permissions. “On” and “Off”
options are found within “Navigation”.
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Italiano, Français, and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows
for more customization with the radio display.
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
182 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Units This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are “Speed” (MPH
or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK],
L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units
of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Message Pop-ups Displayed with Button Press This setting will turn message notifications on or off.
System Text Size
This setting will allow you to change the text on the radio to “Standard”, “Large”, or
“Taller”.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
be Off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or
“Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. An available option is
“Hey Uconnect”.
Voice Barge-in
This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off. For more information about
Voice Barge-in, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
Ambient Color Personalization
This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the ambient light-
ing color in the cabin.
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep the radio on for the selected amount of time after vehicle shut
off. The available options are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off with Door
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay
time is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 183
5
Setting Name Description
Key Off Power Delay This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off”
options.
New Text Message Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Settings
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Uconnect Own-
er’s Manual Supplement for further information.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” set-
ting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate
the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the
comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Audio Settings This setting will open the submenu containing the audio settings
page 196.
TomTom Traffic And Travel Services
This setting will turn TomTom® Traffic And Travel Services (if equipped) on or off. An
active subscription is required for this feature to work.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are
“Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto”
changes the theme with the headlights.
184 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ
depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the
available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or off. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an
audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will
provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking
Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning alert
sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in
view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW
system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the
FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off. This setting is
located in “Automatic Emergency Braking”.
Active Lane Management This setting will alert the driver by vibrating the steering wheel and moving the steering
wheel, only vibrate, or only move the steering wheel when a lane departure is
detected. The available options within Active Lane Management are Lane Manage-
ment “Vibration Only”, “Steering Assist Only”, and “Vibration + Steering Assist”; Lane
Warning “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”; Vibration Strength “Low”, “Medium” and
“High”; and Steering Assist Strength “Low”, “Medium” and “High”.
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.
Traffic Sign Assist Warning This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic sign. The avail-
able options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
Night Vision Video Warning This setting will turn the Night Vision Video Warning and green/gray cluster indicator
lights on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 185
5
Setting Name Description
ParkSense This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected
and can provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Active ParkSense Mode This setting will adjust the level of vehicle control when the Active ParkSense Mode is
active. The available settings are “Full Auto” and “Steering Only”
Active ParkSense Proximity Chime This setting will turn the Active ParkSense Proximity Chime on or off.
Side Distance Warning This setting will adjust the warning for side distance. The available options are “Off”,
“Sound Only”, and “Sound & Display”.
Drowsy Driver Detection This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any changes, indi-
cating that the driver may be drowsy. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Blind Spot Alert This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in the
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting
will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime”
setting will activate the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Electric Power Steering Default This setting will change the Electric Power Steering mode. The available options are
“Comfort” for a lower effort steering experience, “Normal” for the standard effort steer-
ing experience, and “Sport” for a higher effort steering experience.
Power Side Step This setting will activate the Power Side Step. The “Auto” setting will lower the step
when the door is opened and retract it once the door is closed. The “Off” setting will
deactivate the feature.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
New Speed Zone Indication This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit has
changed in an area. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
186 MULTIMEDIA
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will con-
trol the time via the GPS location.
Set Time This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours or minutes.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours or minutes.
Time Format This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour
format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”, you can
scroll through the available days, months, and years.
Show Time and Date During Screen Off This setting will allow you to show the time and date while the screen is off. Available
options are “On” and “Off”.
Set Time Hours This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will
decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
MULTIMEDIA 187
5
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smart-
phone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All settings menu. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The settings are “Auto Reply”
(both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply
Message” (create message).
Phone Repetition This setting will turn the Phone Repetition function on or off.
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. An available option is
“Hey Uconnect”.
Voice Barge-In This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement is com-
pleted by the system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
188 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Show Command List This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List
and provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will
turn the Command List off.
Navigation
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which
icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Trailer
When the Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Current Trailer Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, and “Trailer 4”. These trailer designa-
tions can be used to save different trailer settings.
Trailer Name This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are
hauling. Select the trailer name from the following list: trailer, boat, car, cargo, dump,
equipment, flatbed, horse, gooseneck, livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility,
and 5th wheel.
Braking This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available options are
“Light Electric”, “Heavy Electric”, “Light Electric Over Hydraulic”, and “Heavy Electric
Over Hydraulic”.
MULTIMEDIA 189
5
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Surround View Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out
of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Forward Facing Camera Guidelines on or off.
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
•
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchased.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Ambient Color Personalization This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the ambient light-
ing color in the cabin.
Interior Ambient Lighting This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of the interior ambient lights. The
available options are “Level 1” through “Level 6”.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”,
“60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
190 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Headlight Illumination On Approach This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is unlocked. “Greeting Lights” must be selected and “Headlight
Illumination on Approach” must be selected above 0 seconds for the feature to be
enabled. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Proximity Wake-Up Proximity detection is a system which activates specific interior and exterior lights as
the vehicle is approached with a valid key fob. This feature provides an increased
sense of welcome and security as the user enters the vehicle in the dark. This setting
will turn the Proximity Wake-Up on or off.
NOTE:
For the exterior lighting to be activated, Headlight Illumination On Approach must be
set to a value other than zero.
Greeting Lights When the “Greeting Lights” feature is selected, it enables “Headlight Illumination On
Approach”. When “Headlight Illumination On Approach” is selected, it allows the
adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors are
unlocked with the key fob. “Greeting Lights” must be selected and “Headlight Illumina-
tion On Approach” must be selected above zero seconds for the feature to be enabled.
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Cornering Lights When this setting is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn
signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the rel-
evant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Flash Lights With Suspension Lower This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Suspension Lower-
ing button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 191
5
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors
will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. Setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
Auto Folding Side Mirrors This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when the vehicle is
turned off, the doors are locked, or the key fob button is pushed. The available options
are “On” and “Off”.
Brakes
When the Brakes button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display a setting related to the vehicle’s brake system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to set the brakes for service. When the setting is selected, a
pop-up will display “Yes” and “No” options.
192 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort
When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated or
the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seats This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut
off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” set-
ting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate
the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the
comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
3rd Row Seat Recline Lockout This setting will activate the 3rd Row Seat Recline Lockout. Selectable options are
“Off”, “Lock On Ignition” and “Always Locked”.
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
•
The Auto Door Locks feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
Auto Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized dealer for service.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 193
5
Setting Name Description
Sound Horn With Lock This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The
“Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press”
setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” set-
ting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are
needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver
door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all
doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on
or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been
linked to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Hands-Free Power Liftgate
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close the power
liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Relock
This setting will lock the doors after 30 seconds of the doors remaining unlocked. The
available options are “On” and “Off”.
194 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when the ignition is
set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
vehicle has been turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”,
and “90 sec”.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension This setting will turn the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension system on or off.
Radio Off Delay This setting will keep the radio on for the selected amount of time after vehicle shut
off. The available options are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off With Door This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay
time is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Windows With Key Fob This setting will allow you to control window function while the vehicle is off. The avail-
able options are “On” and “Off”.
Suspension
When the Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sound Horn With Lower This setting will allow you to sound the horn when the Suspension Lowering button is
pushed on the key fob.
MULTIMEDIA 195
5
Setting Name Description
Flash Lights With Lower This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Suspension Lower-
ing button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension This setting will turn the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension system on or off.
Display Suspension Messages This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster Display. The
“All” setting will display all available messages. The “Warnings Only” setting will only
display warning messages.
Tire Jack Mode This setting will disable the Air Suspension system to assist in changing a spare tire.
Auxiliary Modes This setting will allow you to set the Auxiliary Suspension Mode. The available options
are “Off”, “Transport Mode”, and “Wheel Alignment Mode”. In Transport Mode, the
vehicle will not auto level when being transported by another vehicle. In Wheel Align-
ment Mode, the vehicle will not auto level when a wheel alignment is being performed.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within
the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/
right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the vol-
ume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”,
“2”, and “Max”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port.
The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
196 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Radio This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started, if selected.
The available settings are “Off”, “On”, and “Recall Last”. With Recall Last, the system
resumes the previous task before vehicle shut off.
Radio off With Door This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay
time is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Volume Adjustment This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option (Media, Phone
Call, Phone, Navigation, etc.). You can set the volume between 0 and 38.
Media Expander This setting will allow you to turn the Media Expander setting “On” or “Off”.
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Notifications Sounds Turn this setting on or off to hear notification sounds throughout your system.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-ups
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected
phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone
on or off.
Navigation Pop-ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation pop-ups on or off.
SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts
This setting turns receiving notifications for SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts on or
off.
MULTIMEDIA 197
5
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays an option related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific
radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
•
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® Settings menu within the SiriusXM®
menu.
Block Explicit This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On”
and “Off”.
Accessibility — If Equipped
After pressing the Accessibility button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Video Button Readback This setting will turn the Video Button Readback feature on or off.
198 MULTIMEDIA
Software Updates
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options are
“On” and “Off”.
System Information
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Version Information
When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying
information about the version of your radio.
License Information
When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the
licensing information of your radio.
Passenger License Information When this feature is selected, Passenger License Information is displayed.
MULTIMEDIA 199
5
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can
clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are
“Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data
from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone projec-
tion. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed
to cancel the screen.
Reset Performance Values This setting will reset the performance values from your vehicle.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The Remote Sound System controls are located on the
rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the
wheel to access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the
rocker switch increases the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the center button makes the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM or
Media, etc.)
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand con-
trol is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
200 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
listenable station, and pushing the bottom of the switch
will seek down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
PASSENGER SCREEN — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Passenger Screen
located above the glove compartment on the passenger
side of the vehicle. From the Passenger Screen, you will
be able to access similar features seen within the
Uconnect radio, such as media functions, Rear Seat
Entertainment with Amazon Fire TV built-in, Navigation,
and device management.
To begin using the Passenger Screen, push the Power
button in the center stack, or press the Power button
under the Controls tab within the Uconnect system. The
Passenger Screen can be turned off by accessing the
Control screen and pressing the Power Off button.
You must link Bluetooth® headphones to the Passen-
ger Screen to begin listening to the system’s audio
page 204.
NOTE:
•
The Passenger Screen will need to be turned On
each time the vehicle is started, and the system will
display the Home Screen upon boot up.
•
Passenger Screen images are for illustration pur-
poses only and may not reflect exact software for
your vehicle.
PASSENGER SCREEN
PERMISSIONS
Through the Uconnect system, features within the Pas-
senger Screen can be activated and deactivated
through Passenger Screen Permissions. To access Per-
missions, press the Vehicle button in the Menu Bar and
select the Settings tab. Then, press the Passenger
Screen settings menu. Press the On button for the Pas-
senger Screen Permission setting to activate
permissions.
By default, the Passenger Screen Permissions setting is
set to Off, and the driver will need to give permission for
the different features.
When Permissions is turned On, you can individually
select the permissions for the following:
•
Navigation
•
Device Manager
•
Rear Seat Entertainment — If Equipped
Passenger Screen Location
Passenger Screen Permissions
MULTIMEDIA 201
5
Passenger Screen Permissions can also be activated
through the Controls screen, under the Vehicle button
in the Menu Bar. If “Deny Passenger Screen Permis-
sions” is turned On, the setting will switch itself to Off.
HOME SCREEN
When the Passenger Screen is started up and no other
media was running during the last ignition cycle, the
Home Screen will display. Here, you can select from the
features of the Passenger Screen. On the left side of
the screen, you can access “Notifications and system
Controls”.
The Notifications button (the bell) will take you to the
Notification screen, identical to what is seen in the
main radio.
You can cycle between the features by swiping left or
right on the touchscreen. When accessing a feature,
press the Home/Apps button on the left side to access
the feature view and select a different feature.
The available features are:
•
Audio
•
Video & Images
•
HDMI
•
Rear Seat Entertainment — If Equipped
•
Navigation
•
Devices
•
Cameras
Controls Screen
From the Controls Screen, you can adjust the daytime/
nighttime brightness of the screen, change headphone
volume, and power off the Passenger Screen.
To change the brightness, adjust the slider up or down,
or press the Up or Down Arrow button located next to
the slider. “Up” will increase brightness; “Down” will
decrease brightness. Daytime and nighttime brightness
levels will vary, and the adjustment maximum/
minimum will differ depending on the time of day.
To change the headphone volume, adjust the slider up
or down, or press the Up or Down Arrow button located
next to the slider. “Up” will increase the volume; “Down”
will decrease the volume.
NOTE:
Headphone volume can also be manually adjusted from
the headphones. Changing the headphone volume
manually will not reflect in the headphone volume
slider on the Passenger Screen.
If the Screen Off button is pressed, the Passenger
Screen will continue to operate, but the screen will go
dark. Tap the screen again to return to the display.
While the screen is off, audio will continue to play from
the Passenger Screen.
The Power Off button will fully shut down the Passenger
Screen. No audio or video will play from it.
Passenger Screen Home Screen
1 — Home Screen Button
2 — Notification Button
3 — Controls Button
4 — Feature Cards
Passenger Screen Controls Screen
1 — Screen Off
2 — Brightness
3 — Pair/Unpair Headphones
4 — Headphone Volume
5—PowerOff
6—Mute
202 MULTIMEDIA
AUDIO AND VIDEO
Audio allows you to listen to your favorite radio station,
a connected USB device, or connected media device.
You can directly change the source on the Home Screen
by pressing the Source button in the feature. You can
also expand it by pressing the Full Screen View button.
To change the media source, press the Source button
and then press on the desired source.
The available sources are:
•
Live Radio (FM, AM, SXM)
•
Bluetooth®
•
USB 1
•
USB 2
•
AUX
•
AV1—IfEquipped
•
AV2—IfEquipped
•
Rear Screen 1 Listen In — If Equipped
•
Rear Screen 2 Listen In — If Equipped
NOTE:
•
Audio devices connected via Bluetooth® must be
done through the Device Manager in the radio. For
more information on pairing a device, refer to your
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
•
If the driver is listening to “Live Radio”, the option
will not be available in the Passenger Screen. Select
“Now Playing On Radio” to listen to the currently
playing station. If the driver selects a radio station
while the Passenger Screen is playing live radio con-
tent, the feed will end on the Passenger Screen and
control will be given to the Uconnect system.
On the Preset menu, you will be able to listen to saved
radio presets. Press the desired preset to begin
listening.
The Browse tab will let you browse through different
radio stations or audio saved onto a USB or audio
device. Press “Browse” and select from the different
folders. You can scroll up and down to view the options
within those folders. Press on the desired radio station
or audio track to begin playing it.
When the USB source is selected, you can chose a
video file to play if saved to a USB device. Press
“Browse” and locate the folder with the video file. Press
the video file name, and it will begin to play on the Pas-
senger Screen.
NOTE:
Not all video files will be supported from a USB. Certain
video files may require digital rights to view or play.
These may be unavailable for playback on the Passen-
ger Screen.
Passenger Screen Audio Feature
1 — All Sources Tab
2—NowPlayingTab
3—BrowseTab
Passenger Screen Radio Mode
1 — Source Buttons
2—NowPlayingTab
3 — Search Button
4 — Radio Presets
5 — Related Button
6 — Seek Down Button
7 — Direct Tune Button
8 — Seek Up Button
9 — Replay Button
MULTIMEDIA 203
5
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH
AMAZON FIRE TV BUILT-IN —
IF EQUIPPED
Rear Seat Entertainment will let you control and listen
in to the content being played on the rear entertain-
ment screens. You can view the contents of the rear
screens, lock the rear screens, change the source of
the rear screens, or turn the rear screens on or off
page 206.
You can access the Headphone pairing screen for Pas-
senger Display by pressing the Headphone button of
the right side of the screen.
HDMI PROJECTING
HDMI lets you connect a device to the provided HDMI
port, using an HDMI cable, and project the device
directly to the Passenger Screen. To begin, plug a a
device into the HDMI port. Then, press the HDMI button
on the touchscreen.
HDMI will continue to show the menu bar and Head-
phone Paring button.
NOTE:
•
The HDMI Card will not automatically launch when a
new device is connected. The HDMI Card will show a
device connected, and the Card will need to be
pressed.
•
If the user disconnects a device from the HDMI port
while the HDMI Card is in full screen, the system will
close HDMI and reload the Home Screen.
DEVICE MANAGER
Device Manager provides an easy place to view all the
devices connected to the Uconnect system and lets you
pair the Driver’s smartphone to the Uconnect system.
You will also pair Bluetooth® headphones to the Pas-
senger Screen from this screen.
For more information on pairing your smartphone, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
To pair a set of Bluetooth® Headphones:
1. If viewing Device Manager in full screen, press the
Add Device button. If viewing Device Manager on the
Home Screen, press “Pair Bluetooth® headphones”.
2. From the pop-up, press “Search For Headphones”.
The system will begin searching for the Bluetooth®
signal of your headphones.
3. Select the name of your headphones from the list of
possible devices. The system will connected to the
headphones.
NOTE:
The Passenger Screen will connect to previously paired
Bluetooth® headphones after Passenger Screen
activation.
Removing Bluetooth® Headphones
1. From the Controls screen, press the Manage Head-
phones button.
2. Press the Settings button (gear icon) next to the set
of headphones you wish to remove.
3. Press “Delete Device”; the Bluetooth® headphones
will be removed from the system.
NAVIGATION
Navigation allows you to assist the driver in searching
for destinations using Uconnect’s built-in Navigation
system. For information on the full functionality of Navi-
gation, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
When a new route is selected from the Passenger
Screen, a confirmation will be sent to the driver. The
driver will be able to confirm or deny the route.
Device Manager
1 — Device Settings
2 — Phone Connection
3 — Media Connection
4 — Apple CarPlay®/Android Auto™ Connection
5 — Add Device
6 — Manage Headphones
7 — Do Not Disturb
8 — Two Active Phones
204 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Using Navigation on the Passenger Screen will not
affect the Navigation screen in the Uconnect system.
The Driver can continue to use Navigation while the
Passenger Screen can “suggest” new routes or stops.
CAMERA
Camera will display the equipped vehicle camera feed.
When selected, press the desired Camera button. The
feed from that camera will display in the center of the
touchscreen. Press the X button or Back Arrow button
to return to the Home Screen.
NOTE:
The Passenger Screen will lose access to a camera if
the driver chooses to view it on the Uconnect system or
if a condition would activate the camera on the
Uconnect system (the rearview camera being activated
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE).
3RD PARTY APPS — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, your vehicle may contain some 3rd party
apps, which will further enhance your Uconnect system.
McIntosh
McIntosh is a 3rd party app that complements your
Uconnect system’s media player. For the app to be
effective, there must be audio playback in the Uconnect
media player. McIntosh can control the playback of
audio as well as display the output level decibel meters.
To launch the app, begin playing audio and follow these
steps:
1. Press the Apps button.
2. Press the McIntosh app.
The McIntosh app will allow you to perform the following
when listening to music:
NOTE:
The seek feature will not work while using Bluetooth®.
Skip Backward Press to skip backward. Press and hold to fast rewind.
Play/Pause Press to play/pause the track.
Skip Forward Press to skip forward. Press and hold to fast forward.
Repeat Press to repeat track. Press again to repeat playlist. Press again to turn off (works only
with a USB device).
Change Channel Down Press to change channel down. Press and hold to seek channel down. While using
AM/FM, pressing the channel down will change the frequency by 0.2. Pressing and
holding in AM/FM will seek channels.
Change Channel Up Press to change channel up. Press and hold to seek channel up. While using AM/FM,
pressing the channel up will change the frequency by 0.2. Pressing and holding in
AM/FM will seek channels.
McIntosh
MULTIMEDIA 205
5
NOTE:
•
The seek feature will not work while using
Bluetooth®.
•
To change the source within the app, press the
source name. Pressing this will open a menu with all
available sources. To change the audio source out-
side of the app, press the Media button, and then
press the Sources button.
To exit the app, press any of the buttons on the bottom
menu bar.
For more information on McIntosh, please visit
https://www.mcintoshlabs.com.
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) WITH
AMAZON FIRE TV BUILT-IN —
IF EQUIPPED
OVERVIEW
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in is
designed to give your family years of enjoyment.
Fire TV lets passengers enjoy a wide variety of content
from popular apps (subscriptions may be required).
Stream videos, play games, listen to music, get informa-
tion, and watch downloaded programs all while on the
road. Two Voice Remotes with Alexa are included with
the system. Press the Microphone button on the Voice
Remote with Alexa to easily find, launch, and control
content.
Check sports scores, play music, control smart home
devices, or see your live camera feeds (compatible
smart home device required and sold separately). In
addition to streaming and downloaded content, chang-
ing the input in Fire TV also enables you to:
•
Mirror what’s on your phone or tablet to Fire TV via
Miracast capable devices
•
Stream your favorite shows with Fire TV
•
Plug and play a variety of standard video games or
devices into the HDMI port
•
Listen to audio over wired or wireless headphones
(not included, customer will have to provide their
own or play audio through in-cabin speakers with
Listen In feature in front seat.)
•
Plug and play a variety of devices into the front seat
Video USB port. USB ports located under the rear
screens are charge only.
•
Watch content individually on each rear display or
mirror across both displays to watch together
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in an active and usable cellular
range and properly equipped with a Uconnect 5 NAV
system and Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV pack-
age. Streaming requires a Wi-Fi connection and regis-
tered Amazon account to run Fire TV in the vehicle.
Streaming service subscriptions are not included. Ser-
vices and features are subject to change or withdrawal
at any time, may not be available in all areas and lan-
guages, and may require separate subscriptions.
Please review this Owner's Manual to become familiar
with RSE features and operation.
GETTING STARTED
1 — Rear Seat Entertainment (Rear Touchscreen)
2 — Headphone Jack
3 — USB C Charging Port
4 — HDMI Port
5 — Uconnect System (Front Touchscreen)
There are four different ways to operate the features of
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in:
•
VoiceRemotewithAlexa
•
Front radio screen
•
Passenger screen (if equipped)
•
Individual rear touchscreens for Rear Seat Enter-
tainment with Fire TV built-in touch on each rear
screen
For information on the front media hub USB/AUX ports
page 72.
Rear Screen Entertainment for Uconnect 5/5 NAV
206 MULTIMEDIA
ACCESSING REAR SEAT
ENTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV
BUILT-IN FROM THE FRONT RADIO
SCREEN
You can access your Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire
TV built-in system by following these steps:
Option 1
1. Press the Media button.
2. Press the Rear Seat button icon.
Option 2
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Uconnect Theater button on the touch-
screen. You may need to navigate to different pages
in the Apps drawer to find the Uconnect Theater
button.
ACCESSING REAR SEAT
ENTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV
BUILT-IN FROM THE REAR
SCREENS
You can also access your Rear Seat Entertainment with
Fire TV built-in by choosing one of the following options:
Option 1
•
The system will automatically turn on when the
vehicle is started. Pushing the power button on the
Voice Remote with Alexa will turn the system back
on if it was manually shut off. If the screen is inac-
tive and goes to a screen saver, the system can be
woken up by either tapping the screen or pushing
any button on the Voice Remote with Alexa.
Option 2
•
Swiping on either of the rear touchscreens.
NOTE:
When using the rear screens, the system will launch
with Fire TV.
ACCESSING REAR SEAT
ENTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV
BUILT-IN FROM THE PASSENGER
SCREEN — IF EQUIPPED
You can also access Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire
TV built-in content from the Passenger Screen.
Follow these steps:
1. Access the Home screen for the Passenger Screen.
2. Swipe right on the Home screen and select Fire TV
Rear Seat Entertainment Controls.
FIRST TIME STARTING UP
(USING THE REAR SCREENS)
Boot-up Screen
When turning on the system for the first time from the
rear screens, a boot-up screen will appear on the sys-
tem displaying the Fire TV logo.
During this boot-up sequence, language options will be
available for the system.
Voice Remote with Alexa Pairing
After the boot-up sequence is complete, the system will
then give the option to pair a Voice Remote with Alexa
(two are included with the system).
Follow the on-screen instructions for how to pair a Voice
Remote with Alexa to the system. Two Voice Remotes
with Alexa are included to be paired with each rear
screen.
A Voice Remote with Alexa can be paired to each rear
screen. It will function with the rear screen it was paired
with. The pairing steps will need to be done for each
rear screen.
NOTE:
If the Voice Remote with Alexa pairing fails, on-screen
instructions will appear for trying to pair again.
Connecting to a Network
During the start-up process, the system will need to be
connected to a network to function. Multiple network
sources can be options for the system.
Some options for a network connection are:
•
Wi-Fi Hotspot using a capable smartphone (if acti-
vated, it will show as a possible network for the sys-
tem on the screen).
•
Outside connection like a home Wi-Fi network.
•
In-vehicle Wi-Fi.
NOTE:
When a network is connected to the system for the first
time, an over-the-air-software update will take place
using the Wi-Fi connection. It is recommended that an
unlimited Wi-Fi connection, if available, be used during
this update. After this first-time update, updates will
only occur when one is available.
MULTIMEDIA 207
5
Account Sign-in
The next step will be the option to sign in to your Ama-
zon account.
There are two options to sign into the system:
•
I already have an Amazon account: Sign in with an
already existing Amazon account
•
I am new to Amazon: Create a new Amazon Account
If “I am new to Amazon” is selected, follow the
on-screen steps to set up an Amazon account with the
system.
Parental Controls
Another feature that will appear during this first time
set up is parental controls.
When the parental controls page appears, it will give
the options “Enable Parental Controls” and “No Paren-
tal Controls”. If “Enable Parental Controls” is selected,
follow the on-screen steps to set up parental controls
for the system.
ALEXA VOICE CONTROL
A feature with Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in that enhances your experience is Alexa. It is
simple to get started using this feature. Push the Micro-
phone button at the top of the Voice Remote with Alexa
to activate Alexa and get started.
LISTEN VIA VEHICLE SPEAKERS
A feature within Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in is the front radio Listen feature. On the front
radio Home screen for Fire TV, select the Listen button
in the top right corner on either card for Screen 1 or 2.
This will allow you to have either rear screen play audio
through all the speakers in the vehicle.
QUICK MENU
Accessing the quick menu will give you more options for
Fire TV.
To access the quick menu, tap the screen and it will
appear. The quick menu is also accessible by pushing
the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote with
Alexa.
Some options of the quick menu are:
•
Power — This will power the screen off.
•
On-Screen Remote — This will bring up the
on-screen remote to use with the system.
•
Back — This will let you go back a page.
•
Home — This will take you to the Home screen.
•
Gear/Settings — This will let you access certain set-
tings in the system. For more setting options, select
“Settings” within the on-screen Gear/Settings
menu.
•
Vehicle — This will bring up the Vehicle menu. From
here you can adjust rear climate controls and the
Are We There Yet? app.
PARENTAL CONTROLS (USING THE
REAR SCREENS)
If parental controls were not set during the first time
start up of the system, they can be set by following
these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote
with Alexa or tap the screen to access Settings in
the “quick menu”.
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in Settings, select “Preferences”.
5. Select “Parental Controls”; from here you can turn
Parental Controls on or off and set up a PIN for the
controls using the Voice Remote with Alexa.
VOICE REMOTE WITH ALEXA
PAIRING (USING THE REAR
SCREENS)
If the Voice Remote with Alexa needs to be paired again
or a new remote is being paired, follow these
procedures:
1. Install batteries into the remote.
2. Tap the screen and Select the Gear/Settings icon on
the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. In Settings, select “Controllers & Bluetooth®
Devices”.
5. From this menu, select “Add New Remote”.
6. Follow the on-screen steps for Voice Remote with
Alexa pairing.
A long press on the Home button can also re-pair a
Voice Remote with Alexa that has become
disconnected.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is included with two Voice Remotes with
Alexa. A Voice Remote with Alexa can be paired to each
rear screen. It will function with the rear screen it was
paired with. The pairing steps will need to be done for
each rear screen.
208 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA SOURCES INPUT (USING
THE FRONT RADIO AND REAR
SCREENS)
Front Radio Screen
Users can select inputs for each rear screen from the
front radio touchscreen by selecting the Rear Seat tab
and choosing the desired content by selecting “Launch
Source” on the Screen 1 or Screen 2 tab.
Inputs available within Launch Source under “Inputs”
are “Fire TV”, “HDMI”, and “USB”.
Rear Screens
To select inputs on the rear screen, scroll down on the
Fire TV Home screen and select your desired input
under “Input”.
Inputs can also be selected from the Brand tab in the
top menu. While in this tab, scroll down to “Inputs” for
selection options.
NOTE:
The Brand tab naming in the top menu will depend on
the naming of the vehicle’s brand.
VOICE REMOTE WITH ALEXA
1. Power Button — Turns the screen for the selected
channel on or off.
2. 5-way Navigation Control — This control has options
by pressing the Circle button Up, Down, Left, or
Right to navigate on-screen for selections and push-
ing the center button to confirm selections.
3. Back — Push to exit out of menus or return to the
previous screen.
4. Home — Push to return to the Fire TV Home screen.
5.
Seek Backward/Rewind Button
— Push and hold to
fast rewind through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to revert back to the previous
track.
6. Volume — Push the - button to decrease the volume
and + button to increase the volume.
7. Channel Guide — Push to access the channel guide
for the system.
8. Mute — Mutes headphone audio.
9. Prime Video — Push to launch Prime Video app.
10. App 1 — Push to navigate to App 1.
11. Microphone Button — Push to activate Alexa.
12. Menu — Push to access the Fire TV menu.
13. Seek Forward Button — Push and hold to fast for-
ward through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to skip to the next track.
14. Play/Pause Button || — Begin/resume or pause
disc play.
15. Channel +/- — Push the up or down arrow button
on the Channel button to browse channels avail-
ableinFireTV.
16. Recent — Push to access recently viewed content
on Fire TV.
17. Gear/Settings — Push to bring up setting options
forFireTV.
18. App 2 — Push to launch App 2.
19. Vehicle Button — Push to activate the Vehicle
menu.
Voice Remote with Alexa
MULTIMEDIA 209
5
REPLACING THE VOICE REMOTE
WITH ALEXA BATTERIES
Each Voice Remote with Alexa requires two AAA batter-
ies for operation.
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
Voice Remote with Alexa, then slide the battery
cover downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recy-
cling procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown inside the
battery compartment.
4. Slide the battery compartment cover back on.
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH
FIRE TV BUILT-IN STREAMING
(USING THE FRONT RADIO AND
REAR SCREENS)
Access Using Launch Source
To access Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in
from the front radio, press the Media tab located on the
bottom menu bar. Then select the Rear Seat option
located on the top menu bar. Select “Launch Source”,
and then under “Inputs” select “Fire TV Home”.
Access Using Browse Media
Selecting “Browse Media” on the front radio screen will
give access to different media within Rear Seat Enter-
tainment with Fire TV built-in.
These options will be in the top menu of “Browse
Media” and include:
•
Fire TV — Selecting “Fire TV” will show streaming
options for categories and to select apps. This
option will be selectable on the left slider menu in
“Browse Media”. While in “Browse Media” under
Fire TV, it will display recent activity under “Recent”.
This will display recent videos viewed from Fire TV
and recent downloads as well.
•
USB Video — Under “USB Videos”, videos will appear
that are options with a USB device connected to
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
•
USB Music — Under “USB Music”, music will appear
that are options with a USB device connected to
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
Access Using the Voice Remote with Alexa and Rear
Screens
Rear passengers will be able to access some options
for streaming by pressing the “Prime Video”, “App 1”, or
“App 2” button on the Voice Remote with Alexa. Select-
ing one of those buttons on the Voice Remote with
Alexa will take you to the home page for that respective
streaming service. Turning on either of the rear screens
will launch Fire TV. By default, the rear screens will
always launch in Fire TV. More streaming options can
be selected on the Fire TV home page.
Fire TV
Fire TV is your source for online streaming with Rear
Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
NOTE:
A data source needs to be connected to the system for
streaming to be accessible. This can be set up when
Fire TV is turned on for the first time on the rear
screens. Some options can be an in-vehicle 4G Wi-Fi
hot spot, capable Wi-Fi hot spot from a mobile device,
or Wi-Fi from an outside source like a home or a garage.
To access Fire TV on the front screen, select “Launch
Source” on the front radio, Rear Seat screen and then
“Fire TV Home” under “Inputs”.
Viewing from the front radio screen or passenger
screen mirrors or controls the Fire TV experience from
one of the rear Fire TV displays.
The menu bar for Fire TV will have the options for
“Home”, “Find”, “Library”, “Brand”, and “Live”.
Below the menu bar will be streaming options linked to
your Prime account like “Prime Video”.
The front radio screen offers some options:
•
Power — This will turn Fire TV on or off.
•
Screen 1 and Screen 2 Toggle — This toggles
between the Rear Screens (for use with front radio
screen only).
•
Collapse — While viewing on the front radio screen,
this will collapse the screen to dashboard view.
•
Source Drawer — This will open the “Source Drawer”
and the source logo will be displayed on the icon.
•
Browse Media — This will open the “Browse Media”
pop-up.
•
Back — This will let you go back the previous page.
•
Fire TV Home — This will take you back to the Fire
TV home page.
•
Menu — This will open the Fire TV menu.
•
Remote icon — This will display the on-screen
remote.
210 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Front radio screen mirroring and watching can only be
done when the vehicle is in PARK. The vehicle must be
in an active and usable cellular range and properly
equipped with a Uconnect 5 NAV system and Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV package. For streaming, a
Wi-Fi connection and registered Amazon account are
required to run Fire TV in the vehicle. Streaming service
subscriptions are not included. Services and features
are subject to change or withdrawal at any time, may
not be available in all areas and languages, and may
require separate subscriptions.
FIRE TV APPS/GAMES
(USING THE REAR SCREENS)
Apps and games can be accessed using Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
To access Apps on the rear screen, turn on the system
and select “Find” in the top menu. On the Find page,
select “Appstore”. Within the Appstore® you can pur-
chase apps and games. From here you can also select
from all the apps and games that have been
purchased.
ARE WE THERE YET?
When a navigation route has been set from the
Uconnect system, the second-row passengers can use
“Are We There Yet?” for an animated screen showing
distance and time remaining on navigation routes, as
well as the estimated time of arrival with pop-up
notifications.
Some screen information includes:
•
Decrease Timing Between Notifications Button
•
Notifications ON/OFF Button
•
Increase Timing Between Notifications Button
•
Arrival Time
•
Time Remaining Until Destination Is Reached
•
Distance Remaining
To access “Are We There Yet?” from the rear screens,
follow these steps:
1. Tap one of the rear screens and select the Vehicle
icon or push the Vehicle button on the Voice Remote
with Alexa.
2. Select “Are We There Yet?” near the bottom of the
menu on the first page of options.
USING THE VIDEO USB PORT
Plug in a USB drive or mass storage device and play
your favorite music or movies.
NOTE:
To view USB media on the rear screens, insert a USB
drive into the port. The USB drive port is located under
the radio controls in the instrument panel.
On the rear screen you can browse the content of the
USB device by going to the USB source in the inputs.
Use the search feature to find your media faster.
PLAY VIDEO GAMES
Connect the video game console to either of the HDMI
ports located behind either of the first row seats.
NOTE:
Certain high-end video games may exceed the power
limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter
page 75.
HEADPHONES OPERATION
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in does not
come equipped with headphones. Customers will need to
provide their own wireless headphones that can be paired
with the system using Bluetooth®. Customers can also
use their own wired headphones and plug them into a
Headphone Jack located under one of the rear screens.
Wireless Headphones Pairing
To pair wireless headphones with Rear Seat Entertain-
ment with Fire TV built-in using the rear screens, follow
these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote
with Alexa or tap the screen.
Headphone Jack/HDMI/USB
1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — USB Port (Charge Only)
3 — HDMI Port
MULTIMEDIA 211
5
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in Settings, select “Controllers & Bluetooth®
Devices”.
5. Select “Other Bluetooth® Devices” and follow the
on-screen steps for pairing.
While multiple headphones can be paired, only one will
output audio at a time.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Rear Climate Controls can also be controlled using Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in page 61.
Rear Climate Controls can be accessed by using the Vehicle menu. Tap on either rear screen and select the Vehicle icon or press the Vehicle button on the Voice Remote with
Alexa. Then select the Rear Climate Controls option.
Options within Rear Climate Controls are:
Icon Description
ON
Climate Control ON Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls on.
OFF
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
SYNC
SYNC Button
Pressing this button will sync both sides of the Rear Climate Controls.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between Manual mode and Automatic mode.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Press the button on the touchscreen to increase or decrease the temperature. The tem-
perature will get warmer as you move up toward the red arrow and colder as you move down toward the blue arrow.
212 MULTIMEDIA
Icon Description
Headliner Mode
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to
one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
1,2,3, etc.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the Climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will
cause Automatic mode to switch to Manual operation.
LEGAL & COMPLIANCE
To access Legal and Compliance information about
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in from the
rear screens, follow these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote
with Alexa or tap the screen.
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in the Settings menu, select “My Fire TV” and
then “Legal & Compliance”.
MULTIMEDIA 213
5
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road Pages,
which provides the vehicle status information while
operating on off-road conditions. It supplies information
relating to the vehicle ride height, the status of the
transfer case, the pitch and roll of the vehicle, and the
active Selec-Terrain mode.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Off Road button
on the touchscreen from the Vehicle menu, and then
press “Launch Off-Road”.
Off-Road Pages has the following selectable pages:
•
Vehicle Dynamics
•
Accessory Gauges
•
Pitch & Roll
•
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
•
Suspension
NOTE:
With a Connected Services subscription, you can record
your Off-Road data and send it directly to the mobile
app. Press the Record button to begin.
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the bot-
tom of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of the
selectable page options. It provides continually updat-
ing information for the following items:
•
Current Transfer Case Status
•
Current Selec-Terrain mode
•
Current Latitude/Longitude
•
Current Altitude of the vehicle
•
Status of Hill Descent
•
Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed Control Selected
Speed in mph (km/h).
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information con-
cerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
•
Steering angle in degrees
•
Status of Transfer Case
•
Status of the Rear Axle Locker — If Equipped
Status Bar
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Current Latitude/Longitude
3 — Current Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control
Vehicle Dynamics Menu
1 — Vehicle Dynamics
2 — Steering Angle
3 — Transfer Case
4 — Rear Axle Status
214 MULTIMEDIA
ACCESSORY GAUGES
The Accessory Gauges page displays the current status
of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature,
Oil Pressure, Transmission Temperature, and Battery
Voltage.
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side)
in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a visualiza-
tion of the current vehicle angle.
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
The Selec-Terrain page displays the current Selec-
Terrain mode through a high resolution image. Adjust-
ing the Selec-Terrain mode will alter the image on the
screen. The vehicle must be in the ON/RUN position to
display Selec-Terrain information.
The selectable modes are as follows:
•
Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4WD Low
•
Sand/Mud
•
Snow
•
Auto — Default
•
Sport
NOTE:
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar will also display the cur-
rent Selec-Terrain mode.
SUSPENSION
The Suspension page displays information concerning
the vehicle’s suspension.
The following information is displayed:
•
Wheel Articulation
•
Current Ride Height Status
○ Off-Road 2
○ Off-Road 1
○ Normal
○ Aero
○ Entry/Exit
Accessory Gauges Menu
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure
4 — Transmission Temperature
5 — Battery Voltage
Pitch & Roll Menu
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
MULTIMEDIA 215
5
NOTE:
The wheel articulation will be represented by a yellow
color in the Wheel Articulation. If Ride Height is
adjusted, the Ride Height indicator on the screen will
switch to the appropriate height and the Wheel Articula-
tion will show the movement and change in height.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by repositioning the mobile phone within the
vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If
your radio performance does not satisfactorily improve
from repositioning the mobile phone, it is recom-
mended that the volume be turned down or off during
mobile phone operation when not using the Uconnect
system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
INFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure
limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in
such a manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or
further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scien-
tific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard air-
planes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encour-
aged to ask for authorization before turning on the wire-
less radio
page 338.
Suspension Menu
1 — Wheel Articulation
2 — Current Ride Height
216 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The sys-
tem automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances
vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal charac-
teristics when the ABS activates:
•
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may con-
tinue to hear for a short time after the stop).
•
Brake pedal pulsations.
•
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop.
The ABS is designed to function with the Original Equip-
ment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may result
in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
•
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output radio
transmitting equipment. This interference can
cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability.
Installation of such equipment should be per-
formed by qualified professionals.
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
•
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is
on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits
of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT
(RSRA)
RSRA alerts you through a visual and auditory notifica-
tion of the possible presence of an object, passenger,
or pet in the rear seats if a rear door was opened up to
10 minutes before the ignition was placed in the
ON/RUN position. RSRA does not directly detect
objects, passengers, or pets in the rear seats. When the
previous conditions are met, RSRA displays the mes-
sage “Check Rear Seat” on the instrument cluster dis-
play and sounds an auditory alert upon the driver plac-
ing the ignition in the OFF position to exit the vehicle.
To enable or disable RSRA, see
page 179.
217
6
WARNING!
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a com-
plete stop, then shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and apply the parking brake.
•
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in
the OFF position, key fob is removed from the
vehicle and vehicle is locked.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
DROWSY DRIVER DETECTION
(DDD) — IF EQUIPPED
DDD detects when the driver is feeling fatigued and
warns the driver to pull over and take a break.
To Activate/Deactivate
DDD can be activated and deactivated through the
Uconnect system by selecting the following in order:
1. “Safety & Driving Assistance”
2. “Drowsy Driver Detection”
WARNING!
The DDD system is an aid for driving and does not
relieve the driver of the responsibility of driving the
vehicle. If you experience fatigue while driving, pull
over safely for a break without waiting for the DDD to
intervene. Only return to the road when you are in the
right physical and mental condition to prevent endan-
gering yourself and other drivers.
System Intervention
Using feedback obtained from the driver’s steering pat-
terns, any buttons/switches that are pressed, and from
the front camera, the system implements two operating
logics:
•
The first operating logic takes the driving style into
account, observing the road and detecting to what
extent the driver can continue driving with few lane
crossing events.
•
The second operating logic measures the time
spent behind the wheel with the vehicle speed
above 40 mph (60 km/h) and below 100 mph
(160 km/h).
If the driving style indicates that the driver is unable to
follow the road trajectory and respect the horizontal
lane markings while within the operating speed range
of the system, a pop-up will display on the instrument
cluster display to suggest that the driver should stop for
a break. An audible signal will also sound.
If the driver accepts the suggestion provided by the sys-
tem by pushing the “OK” button on the left side of the
steering wheel, the message will disappear from the
display.
If the driver does not acknowledge the warning it will
be displayed for 60 seconds and then disappear.
NOTE:
In the event of a DDD system failure, a dedicated mes-
sage will appear in the instrument cluster display.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL
(EBC) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced EBC system.
This system includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force Dis-
tribution (EBD), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Elec-
tronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Hill Start Assist (HSA),
Intersection Collision Assist (ICA), and Traction Control
System (TCS). These systems work together to enhance
both vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic Steer-
ing Torque (DST), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Ready
Alert Braking (RAB), and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
DDD Warning Message
218 SAFETY
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake application and
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can
help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply con-
tinuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence
(do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-
ing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the
safety of others.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is
not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent over-
slip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front
axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitor-
ing the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of
the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” mode
(if equipped). See
page 219 for a complete expla-
nation of the available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot pre-
vent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that
involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
gerous manner which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist
in counteracting these conditions. Engine power may
also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
•
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to
the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteract-
ing the oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the Trac-
tion Control System (TCS) is active. If the ESC
SAFETY 219
6
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
•
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
•
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to
the steering system, suspension, braking system,
tire type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and
unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in
this mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used
for specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for acti-
vation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally
allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push
and release of the button will toggle the ESC modes.
Multiple attempts may be required to return to "ESC On"
mode.
WARNING!
•
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is
reduced.
•
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode. It should go out with the engine run-
ning. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine running, a mal-
function has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC sys-
tem becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
220 SAFETY
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailing road condi-
tions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
•
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the
ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode.
•
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driv-
ing while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle
speed while descending hills during various
driving situations. HDC controls vehicle
speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overrid-
ing with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the fol-
lowing conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
•
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
•
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
•
The parking brake is released.
•
The driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set
speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be
adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The following sum-
marizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
•
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
activate.
•
R=0.6mph(1km/h)
•
N=1.2mph(2km/h)
•
D=0.6mph(1km/h)
•
1st=0.6mph(1km/h)
•
2nd=1.2mph(2km/h)
•
3rd=1.8mph(3km/h)
•
4th=2.5mph(4km/h)
•
5th=3.1mph(5km/h)
•
6th=3.7mph(6km/h)
•
7th=4.3mph(7km/h)
•
8th=5.0mph(8km/h)
•
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target
speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by
the transmission. When actively controlling HDC the
transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-
selected set speed and corresponding driving
conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of
the following conditions occur:
•
The driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or
brake application.
•
The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
•
The vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill
grade.
•
The vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the fol-
lowing conditions occur:
•
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
•
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
•
The parking brake is applied.
•
The driver door opens.
•
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
•
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
•
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
SAFETY 221
6
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the
driver about the state HDC is in.
•
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.
This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
•
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for sev-
eral seconds, then extinguish when the driver
pushes the HDC switch but enable conditions are
not met.
•
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for sev-
eral seconds, then extinguish when HDC disables
due to excess speed.
•
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when
HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The
flashing will stop and HDC will activate again once
the brakes have cooled sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete
stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake
while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does
not apply the throttle before this time expires, the sys-
tem will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
•
The feature must be enabled.
•
The vehicle must be stopped.
•
The parking brake must be off.
•
The driver door must be closed.
•
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
•
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direc-
tion (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R) gear).
•
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmis-
sion is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
•
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster dis-
play, see
page 92 for further information.
•
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
page 179 for further information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
•
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deacti-
vated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be
enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle
and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is
released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually activate the
trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure
prior to releasing the brake pedal.
•
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the park-
ing brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be
certain to place the transmission in PARK.
•
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a col-
lision or serious personal injury.
222 SAFETY
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet condi-
tions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake
pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers
are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver interaction is
required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates
when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the
driver. The Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will pre-
pare the brake system for a panic stop.
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) is intended for
off-road driving in 4WD Low only. SSC main-
tains vehicle speed by actively controlling
engine torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overrid-
ing with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the fol-
lowing conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
•
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
•
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
•
The parking brake is released.
•
The driver door is closed.
•
The driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once
the following conditions are met:
•
Driver releases throttle.
•
Driver releases brake.
•
Transmission is in any selection other than PARK.
•
Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and
can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally,
the SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a
grade and the level of set speed reduction depends on
the magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the
SSC set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
•
1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
•
2nd=1.2mph(2km/h)
•
3rd=1.8mph(3km/h)
•
4th=2.5mph(4km/h)
•
5th=3.1mph(5km/h)
•
6th=3.7mph(6km/h)
•
7th=4.3mph(7km/h)
•
8th=5mph(8km/h)
•
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
•
REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
•
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
•
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
•
During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for SSC tar-
get speed selection but will not affect the gear cho-
sen by the transmission. While actively controlling
SSC the transmission will shift appropriately for the
driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving
conditions.
•
SSC performance is influenced by the Select-Terrain
mode. This difference may be notable to the driver
and may be perceived as a varying level of
aggressiveness.
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of
the following conditions occur:
•
Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
application
•
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h)
•
Vehicle is shifted to PARK
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the follow-
ing conditions occur:
•
The driver pushes the SSC switch.
•
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
•
The parking brake is applied.
•
The driver door opens.
•
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
•
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately).
SAFETY 223
6
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
switch has an LED which offers feedback to the driver
about the state SSC is in.
•
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated.
This is the normal operating condition for SSC.
•
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.
•
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for sev-
eral seconds then extinguish when SSC disables
due to excess speed.
•
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then extin-
guish when SSC deactivates due to overheated
brakes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when driving in off-road conditions. The
driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions
and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS
may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake
Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a limited
slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of
the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine power
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may
remain enabled even if the TCS and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati-
cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations
page 164.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC sys-
tem is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)
BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside the
rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the
blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
in width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The
zone length starts at the side of the vehicle, near the
B-pillar, and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond
the rear fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed is 7 mph (11 km/h) or
higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these
areas. BSM will alert earlier on faster-approaching
vehicles – up to 33 mph (54 km/h) difference.
NOTE:
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and
trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
Rear Detection Zones
224 SAFETY
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in ran-
dom false detections on the trailer, and false chimes
when the turn signal is used
page 179.
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud,
or other road contaminations accumulate on the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located. The
system may also detect blockage if the vehicle is operated
in areas with extremely low radar returns such as a desert
or parallel to a large elevation drop. If blockage is
detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Sensor
Blocked” message will display in the cluster, both mirror
lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP alerts will not
occur. This is normal operation. The system will automati-
cally recover and resume function when the condition
clears or when an ignition cycle occurs. To minimize sys-
tem blockage, do not block the area of the rear fascia/
bumper where the radar sensors are located with foreign
objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it
clear of road contaminations.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors. In addition, when the
turn signal is activated during the alert on the side of
the vehicle corresponding to the alert, an audible
(chime) alert can be heard. During this audible (chime)
alert, the radio volume will be reduced
page 227.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system
will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with a
relative speed of less than 33 mph (54 km/h). Fast
approaching vehicles will receive an earlier alert based
on relative speed.
Sensor Location (Left Side Shown)
BSM Warning Light
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
SAFETY 225
6
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two
vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foli-
age, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may
alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adja-
cent lanes.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of
the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of
the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected,
alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side
of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
5 mph (8 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sen-
sors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
Opposing Traffic
RCP Detection Zones
226 SAFETY
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path (RCP) Detection is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver
detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation.
Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when
using RCP. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Blind Spot Modes
Three selectable modes of operation are available in
the Uconnect system
page 179.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM sys-
tem will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If
the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the
same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on)
will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started, the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING
(FCW) WITH MITIGATION
FCW with Mitigation system provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the instru-
ment cluster display), and may apply a brake jerk to
warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal colli-
sion. The warnings and limited braking are intended to
provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these pro-
gressive warnings, then the system will provide a lim-
ited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 39 mph (62 km/h), the system
may provide the maximum or partial braking to mitigate
the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle com-
pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at a standstill
for two seconds and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
SAFETY 227
6
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
•
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
•
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other
than vehicles, such as guardrails or sign posts
based on the course prediction. This is expected
and is a part of normal FCW activation and
functionality.
•
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking
events within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking
portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next igni-
tion cycle.
•
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to
the surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low, the
FCW system will be automatically deactivated.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the respon-
sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning
could lead to serious injury or death.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are pro-
grammable through the Uconnect system
page 179.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting
and the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warn-
ings and it applies autonomous braking.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Far", the system
provides possible collision warnings on objects farther
away. This results in earlier warnings and provides the
most reaction time to avoid possible collisions.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Near", the sys-
tem provides possible collision warnings on objects
closer to the vehicle. This results in later warnings and
provides less reaction time than the "Far" and "Medium"
settings, which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
•
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” pre-
vents the system from providing limited active brak-
ing, or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision, but maintains the audible and visual
warnings.
•
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the sys-
tem from providing autonomous braking, or addi-
tional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
•
The system will retain the last setting selected by
the driver after ignition shut down.
•
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in
the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are
far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with
the same or higher rates of speed.
•
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condi-
tion that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle
is still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the condition
that limited the system performance is no longer pres-
ent, the system will return to its full performance state.
If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster dis-
plays:
•
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
•
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal condi-
tions, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
228 SAFETY
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)
PEB is a subsystem of the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) system which provides the driver with audible
warnings and visual warnings, in the instrument cluster
display. It may apply limited automatic braking when it
detects a potential frontal collision with a
pedestrian/cyclist.
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 39 mph
(62 km/h), the system may provide maximum braking
to mitigate the potential collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist. If the PEB event stops the vehicle completely,
the system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two
seconds and then release the brakes. When the system
determines a collision with the pedestrian/cyclist in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect
every type of potential collision with a pedestrian. The
driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Fail-
ure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury
or death.
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the sys-
tem to warn you of a possible frontal collision with the
pedestrian/cyclist.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display in the
control settings
page 179.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian Emer-
gency Braking button once.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking button again.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the sys-
tem, so no warning or active braking will be available in
case of a possible frontal collision with the
pedestrian/cyclist.
NOTE:
The PEB system will retain the last setting selected by
the driver after ignition shut down. The system will not
reset to the default setting when the vehicle is
restarted.
Intersection Collision Assist (ICA) —
If Equipped
ICA uses three front radar sensors located in the front
fascia/bumper, to detect oncoming vehicles from the
front or side when driving through an intersection.
When the system determines that a collision is prob-
able when turning across oncoming traffic, the system
will attempt to mitigate a possible collision by decelerat-
ing the vehicle. When the system determines that a
collision with a crossing vehicle is probable, the system
may apply additional braking to supplement the driver
braking input to attempt to mitigate a possible collision.
The system will also provide audible warnings and
visual warnings (shown in the instrument cluster). If the
driver determines acceleration is needed to avoid a
collision, when the accelerator is pressed ICA will
cancel.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pres-
sure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven — this is normal
and there should be no adjustment for this increased
pressure.
For information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires, see
page 313.
PEB Message
SAFETY 229
6
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom-
mended cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must
be increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in
order for the TPMS Warning Light to be turned off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi
(165 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough
to turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still
be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn
off only after the tires have been inflated to the vehi-
cle’s recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor is
not designed for use on aftermarket wheels and
may contribute to a poor overall system perfor-
mance or sensor damage. Customers are encour-
aged to use Original Equipment Manufacturer
(OEM) wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature
operation.
•
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will pre-
vent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a
tire failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wire-
less technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sen-
sors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted
to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
230 SAFETY
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to regularly check the
tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the
proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) consists of
the following components:
•
Receiver module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster, and a
graphic displaying tire pressures
•
TPMS Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated, when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. In addi-
tion, the instrument cluster will display an "Inflate to XX"
message and a graphic display of the pressure value(s)
with the low tire(s) in a different color
page 92.
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
BAR, or kPa.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on
the graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold
tire pressure displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic dis-
play of the pressure value(s) will return to its original
color and the TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once
the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid
when a system fault is detected. The system fault will
also sound a chime. The instrument cluster display will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a mini-
mum of five seconds. This message is then followed by
a graphic display, with “--“ in place of the pressure val-
ue(s), indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will no longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message will not be present, and a pressure
value will be displayed instead of dashes. A system
fault can occur by any of the following:
•
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as
the TPMS sensors.
•
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
•
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
•
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
NOTE:
There is no Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor in
the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the
tire pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
remain on, a chime will sound, and the instrument clus-
ter display will still display a pressure value in the differ-
ent color graphic display and an “Inflate to XX” mes-
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
SAFETY 231
6
sage will be displayed. After driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,
the instrument cluster display will display a “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then dis-
play dashes (--) in place of the pressure value. For each
subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound,
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the instrument cluster display will display a
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the instru-
ment cluster display will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be
deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assem-
blies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do
not have TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors. Then, drive
the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h).
The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of
the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will
no longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
Tire Fill Alert
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire
Fill Alert feature in the apps menu of the Uconnect
system.
NOTE:
•
The Tire Fill Alert system will only support inflating or
deflating one tire at a time. The user is required to
wait until the hazard lights STOP flashing or
26-30 seconds after the desired pressure is
achieved in one wheel before switching to another.
•
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the system
is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system detects
an increase in tire pressure while filling the tire. The
ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode with the trans-
mission in PARK.
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to enter
Tire Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is
in Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard lamps do not come
on while inflating the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System sensor may be in an inoperative position, pre-
venting the TPMS sensor signal from being received. In
this case, the vehicle may need to be moved slightly
forward or backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
display screen will be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Operation:
•
The horn will chirp once to let the user know when
to stop filling the tire, when it reaches recom-
mended pressure.
•
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overfilled
and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the
user continues to inflate the tire.
•
The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let
out to reach proper inflation level.
•
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then
underinflated and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire.
232 SAFETY
Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) —
If Equipped
The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an
optional feature that is included as part of the normal
Tire Fill Alert system. The system is designed to allow
you to select a pressure to inflate or deflate the vehi-
cle's front and rear axle tires to, and to provide feed-
back while inflating or deflating the vehicle's tires.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is
located in the apps menu of the Uconnect system, you
will be able to select a pressure setting for both the
front and rear axle tire pressures by scrolling through a
pressure range from greater than or equal to 15 psi to
XX psi in 1 psi increments for each axle setting.
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values for the
front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle placard
pressure label.
You may also store pressure values chosen for each
axle in the Uconnect system application as preset pres-
sure values. Up to two sets of preset pressure values
can be stored in the Uconnect system for the front and
rear axle. Once you select the tire pressures for the
front and rear axles that you want to inflate or deflate
to, you can begin inflating or deflating one tire at a
time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or deflating
one tire at a time. The user is required to wait until the
hazard lights STOP flashing or 26-30 seconds after the
desired pressure is achieved in one wheel, before
switching to another.
The system will be activated when the TPMS receiver
module detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, with the transmission in
PARK. The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster. If the
hazard lamps do not come on while inflating or deflating
the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor may
be in an inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor
signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle may
need to be moved slightly forward or backward.
Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are
inflated/deflated. The horn will chirp under the follow-
ing STFA states:
1. The horn will chirp once when the selected pressure
is reached to let you know when to stop inflating or
deflating the tire.
2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overin-
flated or over-deflated.
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough air is
added or removed to reach proper selected pres-
sure level.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
FEATURES
•
Seat Belt Systems
•
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
•
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly must be secured in the appropri-
ate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in
a rear seating position
page 249.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use
the proper child restraint
page 249.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
SAFETY 233
6
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs,
the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
page 336 for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
This can happen far away from home or on your own
street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibil-
ity of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking
the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle
should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will sig-
nal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front
seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front pas-
senger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when
an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passen-
ger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder
Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the
BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts
are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is
traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin
until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoc-
cupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or
other items are placed on the outboard front passenger
seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or out-
board front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the
driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
234 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col-
lisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
•
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt
for more than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,
take it to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
•
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so
that your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
•
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a colli-
sion and leave you with no protection. Inspect the
seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
involved in a collision, or if you have questions
regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
SAFETY 235
6
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the
front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immedi-
ately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded web-
bing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the
top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from your
neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release
the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
236 SAFETY
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will pre-
fer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and
if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoul-
der belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
upward position without pushing or squeezing the
release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
•
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
•
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is com-
fortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
•
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
•
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
Third Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The third row center seat belts feature a seat belt with a
mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt
to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is
folded. The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can
then be stored out of the way in the headliner for added
convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas
behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
from its stowed position in the headliner slightly
behind third row seat.
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over
the seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right
head restraint.
Mini-Latch Stowage
Mini-Latch Plate
Routing The Rear Seat Belt Latch Plate
SAFETY 237
6
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to
go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-
buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate
into the center slot on the mini-buckle. The seat
belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the web-
bing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its
stowed position.
WARNING!
•
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used by
an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to pro-
vide proper restraint and will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
•
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the pre-
ceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate
and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reat-
tach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
Third Row Belt Guides
NOTE:
There are three belt guides located on the top of the
seat backs, one for each seating position in the third
row. They can be used to keep the shoulder belt in a
fixed position for additional comfort, if needed.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you
with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
a different occupant, it must be removed.
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
Third Row Belt Guides
238 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
•
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the rec-
ommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the
seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a
collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner
or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further
reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The
seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint sys-
tem
page 255.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Captain's Chairs Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Second Row Bench (8 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
SAFETY 239
6
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click”.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Auto-
matic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indi-
cates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking
Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-
gency) locking mode.
WARNING!
•
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
•
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or chil-
dren who are using booster seats. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
•
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
•
Supplemental Side Air Bags
•
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
240 SAFETY
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight sec-
onds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes
on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a mal-
function is detected that could affect the air bag sys-
tem. The diagnostics also record the nature of the mal-
function. While the air bag system is designed to be
maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air
bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemen-
tal Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a
single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has
been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immedi-
ately
page 89.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front air
bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint sys-
tems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center
of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com-
partment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your
arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument
panel.
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
(Continued)
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Pas-
senger Knee Air Bag
SAFETY 241
6
WARNING!
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors
(if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight
input, as determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective cov-
ers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col-
lisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are
not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves
are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper pas-
senger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size.
The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes
to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of
the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
•
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The
OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC
242 SAFETY
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant
classification. In order for the OCS to operate as
designed, it is important for the front passenger to be
seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag.
The OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
•
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
senger, including a child; or
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-
facing child restraint; or
•
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or
her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of
time.
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint sys-
tem, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front
passenger seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most prob-
able classification. The OCS estimates the seated
weight on the front passenger seat and where that
weight is located. The OCS communicates the classifi-
cation status to the ORC. The ORC uses the classifica-
tion to determine whether the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is impor-
tant for the front passenger to be seated properly and
properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
•
Sitting upright
•
Facing forward
•
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet com-
fortably on or near the floor
•
Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
SAFETY 243
6
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce
the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects. The OCS will detect the front passen-
ger’s decreased or increased seated weight, which may
result in an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not
mean that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front pas-
senger seat may result in a reduced-power deployment
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front pas-
senger seat may result in a full-power deployment of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
•
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or
instrument panel).
•
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
•
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
•
The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
•
Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
•
Objects are lodged between the front passenger
seat and center console.
•
Accessories that may change the seated weight on
the front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
•
Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most prob-
able classification. If an occupant in the front passen-
ger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide
an output signal to the OCS that is different from the
occupant’s properly seated weight input, for example:
WARNING!
•
If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
244 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet com-
fortably on or near the floor.
•
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger
seat. Holding an object may provide an output sig-
nal to the OCS that is different than the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
•
Placing an object on the floor under the front pas-
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on
the floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is
unable to classify the front passenger seat
status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect
the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or
it comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service
immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed. Do not
make any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US
LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the spe-
cific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
•
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
•
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
•
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem (SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part
except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
•
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently
change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or serious
injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not
comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
•
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
•
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front
Passenger Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column and a Supplemental Passenger
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air
Bags provide enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts, preten-
sioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a
label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the
seats.
SAFETY 245
6
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating
SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at
a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other inju-
ries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in cer-
tain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Chil-
dren are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploy-
ing air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or com-
plete ejection of vehicle occupants through side win-
dows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
•
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the deploy-
ment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the
side windows where the SABIC and its deployment
path are located should remain free from any
obstructions.
•
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into
the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air
Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occu-
pant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (S ABIC)
Label Location
246 SAFETY
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some
side collisions that do not impact the area of the pas-
senger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front
air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than
it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
•
Occupants, including children, who are up against
or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children,
should never lean on or sleep against the door,
side windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
•
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that
is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
•
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the cen-
ter of the seat.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
•
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you prop-
erly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy
at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you
have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed
to activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether deploy-
ment in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags and seat belt pretensioners should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing
system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt pre-
tensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or com-
plete ejection of vehicle occupants through side win-
dows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
•
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
•
Supplemental Side Air Bags
•
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
•
The air bag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the
air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are simi-
SAFETY 247
6
lar to friction rope burns or those you might get slid-
ing along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are not per-
manent and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if
you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-
like particles. The particles are a normal by-product
of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used
for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have
skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these par-
ticles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immedi-
ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
•
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication net-
work remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
•
Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped)
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System
•
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of
these other functions in response to the Enhanced Acci-
dent Response System:
•
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
•
Cut off battery power to the:
○ Engine
○ Electric Motor (if equipped)
○ Electric power steering
○ Brake booster
○ Electric park brake
○ Automatic transmission gear selector
○ Horn
○ Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the
ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compart-
ment and on the ground near the engine compartment
and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the
vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an acci-
dent, reset the system by following the procedure
described below. If you have any doubt, contact an
authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem functions after an event, the ignition switch must
be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the
system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after per-
forming the reset procedure, the vehicle must be towed
to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to pro-
tect you. Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or stickers to
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper pas-
senger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify
the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
(Continued)
248 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in
any way (including removal or loosening/tightening
of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabili-
ties, contact an authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in cer-
tain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
•
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
•
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during
a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could be badly
(Continued)
WARNING!
injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for chil-
dren from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to
http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
•
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
SAFETY 249
6
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have out-
grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can
be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direc-
tion than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-
facing by children who have outgrown their infant car-
rier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-
positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit
properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
250 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident,
it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all
the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touch-
ing the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then
the child still needs to use a booster seat in this
vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check
seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt
buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can
move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt con-
tacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the cen-
ter of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the
seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may result
in serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) XX
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
SAFETY 251
6
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no
lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Label
Captain’s Chairs Second Row LATCH Positions
(7 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Second Row Bench LATCH Positions (8 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
252 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to
attach the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child
and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more
than 65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for
more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the
center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the
seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s
manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No Headrests must be in the folded up position when installing child seat.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback, below the
anchorage symbols on the seatback. They
are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the seatback
and seat cushion.
Second Row LATCH Positions (7 Passenger) Second Row LATCH Positions (8 Passenger)
SAFETY 253
6
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the
back of the seat.
Seven And Eight Passenger Vehicles: 2nd Row Upper
Tether Anchorage Locations
Seven And Eight Passenger Vehicles: 3rd Row Upper
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to
the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connec-
tion to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints
and some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have
a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage
and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the
anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Seven Passenger And Eight Passenger Third Row
Seating:
WARNING!
•
Do not install a child restraint in the center posi-
tion using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and
tether anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
•
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. See
page 255
for typical installation instructions.
Eight Passenger Second Row Seating:
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard posi-
tion, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in
the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors
or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. For typical installation
instructions, see
page 255.
Third Row LATCH Positions (7 And 8 Passenger)
Seven Passenger Top Tether Anchorages
(Captain's Chairs)
Eight Passenger Top Tether Strap Mounting
(2nd Row Bench)
Tether Anchorages (3rd Row Bench)
254 SAFETY
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See
page 255 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. For the second row seats,
and third row left outboard seat, move the seat back
rearward to the fourth locking position from full
upright to attach the seat to the lower LATCH
anchorages.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position. Adjust the seat back forward to the
most vertical locking position. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward, you may wish to move
it to its rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See
page 257 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor.
Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH sys-
tem, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and
out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter-
feres with the child restraint installation, instead of
buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it.
Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they
should not play with them.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they
to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
•
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the
seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the web-
bing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor
page 257.
Please see the table below and the following sections
for more information.
SAFETY 255
6
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For
Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat
belt to attach a forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward-facing child restraint, up to the recom-
mended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Headrests must be in the folded up position when install-
ing child seat.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Second Row Bench (8 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
256 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
•
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating posi-
tion. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the web-
bing to retract back into the retractor. As the web-
bing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking
mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, con-
nect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten
the tether strap. See
page 257 for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
(Continued)
WARNING!
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See
page 252 for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchor-
age. If the seat can be moved, you may need to
move the seat forward to provide better access to
the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the child
restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and the child
seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear
head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
SAFETY 257
6
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING!
•
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possi-
bly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped)
in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collec-
tion & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity”
page 109.
Second Row Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting
(8 Passenger Seating)
Captain’s Chair Top Tether Strap Mounting
(7 Passenger Second Row)
Third Row Seating Top Tether Strap Mounting
258 SAFETY
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the pos-
sible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
MAKE INSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding the seat belt or retractor condi-
tions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon
as possible. After the bulb check, this light will illumi-
nate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
System has been detected. It will stay on until the fault
is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
page 233.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should be
able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See
an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inop-
erable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the opera-
tion of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use
a floor mat that is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair
safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
•
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or
stack an additional floor mat on top of
an existing floor mat.
•
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved
floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of
your vehicle.
•
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any
pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the
floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
•
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
•
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
•
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interfer-
ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
•
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the
floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure
(Continued)
SAFETY 259
6
WARNING!
to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
•
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always
check your floor mat has been properly installed
and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat
fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU
SHOULD MAKE OUTSIDE THE
VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other
objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the
tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the lug nut/bolt torque for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper
cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instru-
ment panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in con-
fined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
•
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
•
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the
vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect
the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compart-
ment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal con-
ditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
260 SAFETY
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located in the
center console just below the climate control screen.
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flash-
ers. When the button is activated, all directional turn
signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of
an emergency. Push the button a second time to turn
off the Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when
your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard
warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate
even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may
discharge the battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM— IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST
and SOS button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber
page 338.
•
The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built-in function.
Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your
Brand Connect service is active and you are con-
nected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
•
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need
a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will be
connected to a representative for assistance. Road-
side Assistance will know what vehicle you’re driving
and its location. Additional fees may apply for road-
side assistance.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Assist And SOS Buttons
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
261
7
•
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
•
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio,
Connected Services, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call sys-
tem initiates a call to a SOS operator, during which
the LED will blink green. To cancel the SOS Call con-
nection, push the SOS call button on the overhead
console or press the cancellation button on the
Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn
off the green LED light on the overhead console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the overhead console will turn green
once a connection to a SOS operator has been
made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
○
Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call
○
The vehicle brand
○
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional assistance is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
○
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
○
Once a connection is made between the vehi-
cle’s SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the
SOS operator may be able to open a voice con-
nection with the vehicle to determine if addi-
tional assistance is needed. Once the SOS opera-
tor opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s
SOS Call system, the operator should be able to
speak with you or other vehicle occupants and
hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehi-
cle’s SOS Call system will attempt to remain con-
nected with the SOS operator until the SOS
operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropri-
ate emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
•
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe
location.
•
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could pre-
vent operable network and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and GPS sig-
nal reception is required for the SOS Call system to
function properly.
•
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR
AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
•
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
262 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may
not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
•
The overhead console lights located within the
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illuminate
red.
•
The Device Screen will display the following mes-
sage “Vehicle device requires service. Please con-
tact an authorized dealer.”
•
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an autho-
rized dealer.”
WARNING!
•
Ignoring the overhead console light could mean
you will not have SOS Call services. If the overhead
console light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
•
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu-
pant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the following fac-
tors:
•
The ignition is in the OFF position
•
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
•
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
•
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash
•
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed
•
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
•
Operator error by the SOS operator
•
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
•
Weather
•
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
•
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to
function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that
your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your pro-
vided radio supplement for complete information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
(Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 263
7
WARNING!
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
•
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
•
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension sys-
tem, there is a feature which allows the automatic level-
ing to be disabled before changing a tire. This feature
can be activated through the Uconnect system
page 195.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
Before changing a tire or using the jack please disable
the hands free lift gate, This feature can be disabled
through the Uconnect system
page 179.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if
changing the driver’s front tire, block the passen-
ger’s rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being raised or lifted.
JACK AND TOOLS LOCATION
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are
located in the rear cargo area, under the load floor.
1. Lift up on the load floor handle to access the jack
and tool storage.
2. Remove the jack storage cover to access the jack
and tools.
Wheel Blocked Example
Load Floor Handle
Jack And Tools Access Cover
264 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Pull up to remove jack and tools from storage.
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle trim level, tools shown may vary.
SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected
to the square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under a rubber plug at the
center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the lift-
gate opening.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or
power tool may damage the winch.
Removing Jack And Tools
Jack And Tools
Jacking Tools Description
1 — Tow Hook (If Equipped)
2 — Wheel Lug Wrench
3 — Jack Handle Extension
4 — Fuel Funnel
5 — Jack Handle
6 — Scissor Jack
Spare Tire Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 265
7
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
vehicle. The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear
cargo area on the outside of the vehicle.
1. Assemble the jacking tools.
2. Locate and remove plug from the storage compart-
ment floor to expose the winch access hole.
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use
the wheel lug wrench and extension to completely
lower the spare tire. Keep turning the handle coun-
terclockwise until the winch stops.
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate it
vertically behind the rear fascia/bumper.
5. Pull the metal retainer toward you to release it.
6. Slide the retainer up the steel extension tube and
winch cable. Rotate the retainer and push it through
the hole in the wheel.
Jacking Tool Assembly
1 — Wheel Lug Wrench
2 — Jack Handle Extension
3 — Jack Handle
Winch Nut Plug
Winch Drive Nut Location
Wrench Rotation
Releasing Winch Retainer
266 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
•
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the trans-
mission in PARK.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely care-
ful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
back of the wheel facing the ground.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts,
using the lug wrench by turning them counterclock-
wise, one turn, while the wheel is still on the ground.
2. Assemble the jack and tools
page 266.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations
are critical. Keep the jack and tools aligned while
raising the vehicle to prevent tool damage. See the
following images for proper jacking locations.
Jack Warning Label
Loosen Lug Nuts
Jack And Tool Assembled
Jacking Locations
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 267
7
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on loca-
tions other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
3. When changing a front tire, place the scissor jack
under the front chassis lifting point, as indicated by
the triangular lift point symbol. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
4. When changing a rear tire, place the scissor jack
under the rear chassis lifting point, as indicated by
the triangular lift point symbol. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
5. Raise the vehicle by using the wheel lug wrench and
jack handle to turn the jack screw clockwise. Raise
the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the
spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum
stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and
install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
268 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
inflatable spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-
clockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9.
Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For correct lug nut
torque
page 330
. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench
by an authorized dealer or at a service station.
10. Position the wheel behind the rear fascia/bumper
with the valve stem facing inward. Push the end of
the winch’s cable, spring and steel sleeve through
the front side of the road wheel. Making sure the
back of the wheel is facing the ground when the
wheel is stowed.
11. Slide the road wheel on the ground until it is
directly under the winch and between the rear
fascia/bumper and exhaust system heat shields.
Raise the tire by turning the lug wrench on the
winch extension clockwise until it clicks/ratchets
three times to make sure the cable is tight.
Mounting Spare Tire
Tighten Lug Nuts
Reinstalling Winch Retainer
Storing Of Road Wheel
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 269
7
NOTE:
Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the
underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch
cable may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire
loose.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
12. Lower the jack to the fully closed position.
13. Return the Jack and tools back into the jack stor-
age bin. Reinstall the jack storage cover by firmly
pushing down until the clips lock into position.
14. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are
properly seated against the wheel.
15. Have the road wheel and tire repaired as soon as
possible and properly secure the spare tire, jack
and tool kit.
NOTE:
Do not drive with the spare tire installed for more than
50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improp-
erly, so please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight
assembly.
NOTE:
The positive (+) battery post may be covered with a pro-
tective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump
directly off positive post which has a positive (+) symbol
on or around the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK (P) and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables’ reach,
apply the parking brake and make sure the ignition
is OFF.
Road Wheel Stowage
Positive (+) Jump Starting Post
270 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
•
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving
fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadver-
tent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle
while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground. A “ground” is an
exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine,
frame or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or
large bolt. The ground must be away from the bat-
tery and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode and could
result in personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle engine.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnecting
procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the dis-
charged vehicle.
Jump Starting Label
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 271
7
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the positive (+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
have the battery and charging system tested at an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for a
Cap-Less Fuel System, which is located with the jack
and tools
page 264. If refueling is necessary, while
using an approved gas can, please insert the refueling
funnel into the filler neck opening.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push around the
perimeter of the fuel door to break the ice buildup and
re-release the fuel door by pushing on the rear outer
edge near the center to unlatch. Do not pry on the door.
In the case of a power loss to the vehicle
page 163.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel
is provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the rear cargo storage area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the
fuel nozzle.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors
open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to turn on.
(Continued)
Refueling Funnel Inserting Funnel
272 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
•
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating can be:
•
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
•
Strong smell of coolant
•
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
•
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
In the event it is observed that the temperature gauge
is moving towards or close to the HOT (H) position, you
can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
•
On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmis-
sion in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine
idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the
brakes.
•
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maxi-
mum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower
control to high. This allows the heater core to act as
a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing
heat from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), as
soon as it’s safe, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with your
foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to maintain con-
trol of the vehicle before activating the Manual Park
Release. If possible, you should apply the parking
brake. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured or properly
connected to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual
(Continued)
WARNING!
Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to
serious injury or death for those in or around the
vehicle.
To move the vehicle in cases where the transmission
will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a depleted bat-
tery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual Park
Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated
in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB), if possible.
Manual Park Release Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 273
7
3. Using a flathead screwdriver or similar tool, remove
the Manual Park Release access cover, which is to
the lower left of the steering column, below the EPB
switch.
4. To unlock handle, insert a flathead screwdriver or
similar tool into the lock release, rotate a quarter
turn counterclockwise and hold simultaneously pull-
ing on the tether strap.
5. Pull the tether strap out as far as it will go, then
release it. The transmission should now be in NEU-
TRAL (N), allowing the vehicle to be moved.
6. Release the EPB only when the vehicle is securely
connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated
in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back to its
original position.
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P).
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and rein-
stall the access cover. If the access cover cannot be
reinstalled, repeat steps 1 through 4.
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released position,
the tether will remain outside of the trim panel and
the access cover cannot be reinstalled.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around
the front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the
gear selector. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE
(D) and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Access Cover
Lock Release
Tether Strap
Tether Reinstalled
274 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic Stabil-
ity Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode, before
rocking the vehicle
page 219. Once the vehicle has
been freed, push the ESC OFF button again to restore
“ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage,
or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for lon-
ger than 30 seconds continuously without stopping
(Continued)
WARNING!
when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
•
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, dis-
abled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described on
page 173.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models
Without 4WD Low Range
Four-Wheel Drive Models With
4WD Low Range
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED See Instructions
•
Transmission in PARK
•
Transfer case in N (Neutral)
•
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL Best Method Best Method Best Method
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 275
7
NOTE:
Vehicle’s equipped with air suspension, must have Tire
Jack Mode
page 195 enabled to prevent air sus-
pension movement during towing.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters,
etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode.
NOTE:
•
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
page 113 feature is disabled before towing this
vehicle to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake
engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is
enabled or disabled via the customer programmable
features in the Uconnect Settings.
•
Vehicles with a discharged battery, or total electrical
failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is
engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the
rear wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle
onto a flatbed.
•
The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the
battery is connected, ignition is ON, transmission is
not in PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you are
towing this vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN
mode, you must manually disable the Electric Park
Brake each time the driver's door is opened by
pressing the brake pedal and then releasing the
EPB.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions on
shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK (P) in
order to move the vehicle
page 273.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
•
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
always secure by tire/wheel straps. Do not attach
to front or rear suspension components, body or
frame. Damage to your vehicle will result from
improper towing.
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels off the ground) under the following conditions:
•
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). For
instructions on shifting the transmission to NEU-
TRAL (N) when the engine is off
page 273.
•
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
•
The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles
(48 km).
CAUTION!
•
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther
than 30 miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable
steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the
straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the
front wheels ON the ground.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels OFF
the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer
case may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL
wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in
NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK
page 173.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case
have no NEUTRAL (N) position, and therefore must be
towed will all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
•
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
(Continued)
276 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
•
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with front and rear recov-
ery tow hooks. The front tow hooks will be located in the
lower fascia/bumper. The rear tow hook is removable
and is located within the jack and tools storage bin
under the load floor of the rear cargo area
page 264.
NOTE:
For off road recovery, it is recommended to use both of
the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to
the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
•
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus-
ing serious injury.
The removable rear tow hook is designed to be used in
the receiver hitch as a recovery option. For rear tow
hook usage, remove the locking pin, place the rear tow
hook into the receiver hitch in any direction and replace
the locking pin.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could dam-
age your vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes
effect in the event of an impact. Detailed information
can be found on
page 248.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data
that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s sys-
tems performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle. Detailed information can be found on
page 249.
Emergency Front Tow Hooks
Removable Rear Tow Hook
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 277
7
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot
or cold ambient temperatures, and extended idling will
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as pos-
sible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change or
for engine oil life reset procedure
page 95.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), or 12 months,
whichever comes first. The engine controller also moni-
tors the number of hours of engine run time, and will
illuminate the oil change indicator after 350 hours
(which is not likely to be exceeded except for certain
fleet customers with extended engine idling periods).
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
•
Check engine oil level
•
Check windshield washer fluid level
•
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
unusual wear or damage
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and fill as needed.
•
Check function of all interior and exterior lights
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plans for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
•
Change oil and filter.
•
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
•
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
•
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
•
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
•
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
•
Inspect exhaust system.
•
Deploy power side steps and clean linkages with high pressure car wash wand to remove any foreign debris. Apply MOPAR Spray White Lithium Grease to the pivot points.
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace engine air cleaner filter, as necessary.
278
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
OrYears:234567 8 9101112131415
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X XXXXX X XXXXXXX
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary.
XXXXXXX
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-
road or frequent trailer towing.
XXXXXXX
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake
function.
XXXXXXX
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 mi (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs (3.0L Engine).
** XX
Replace spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
** X
Replace spark plugs (6.4L Engine).
** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
XX
Replace accessory drive belt. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
8
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
OrYears:234567 8 9101112131415
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect accessory drive belt tensioner and pul-
ley, replace if necessary.
X
Change transfer case fluid. X
Replace PCV valve. X
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and affect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.0L ENGINE
1 — Intercooler Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Battery
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
3 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
8
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Battery
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6.4L ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Battery
2 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
8
CHECKING OIL LEVEL —
3.0L ENGINE
The 3.0L engine does not have a traditional “dipstick”
and there is no need to manually check the oil level. If it
is desired to check engine oil level, it can be seen on
the instrument cluster display by navigating to the
appropriate screen under “Vehicle Information”. Use
the up
or down arrow buttons within the steer-
ing wheel controls to find the “Vehicle Information”
menu. Then use the right
or left arrow buttons
until you reach the “Oil Level” sub-menu.
There is a bar on the gauge which shows the oil level.
As long as the oil level is between the minimum and the
maximum it is safe to operate the vehicle. If the oil level
is either too high or too low, a red bar will be
illuminated.
When the engine is in need of more oil, the Oil Level
Warning Light will illuminate. This warning will appear
for five seconds. Within the next 300 miles (500 km)
you should add one quart of manufacturer specified
motor oil to the engine
page 334.
Oil Level Critically Low
(Add Two Quarts)
Oil Level Low
(Add One Quart)
Oil Level Ok
Oil Level Critically High
This light will reappear every time the engine is started
until a safe level is detected. Continuing to operate the
vehicle without adding oil may result in a critically low
oil level and possible engine damage (see “Critically
Low” below).
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as engine
oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc. to minimize spillage
onto top of engine. Any excess fluid that is spilled onto
the top of the engine should be removed using com-
pressed air or absorbent cloth.
Oil Level Display - How To Refresh
In vehicles equipped with the 3.0L engine, the oil level
is automatically monitored when the vehicle is parked
on a level surface, the oil is warm, and the engine has
been off four minutes. To refresh the oil level display
(after a quart of the correct oil has been added), follow
this process:
•
Run the engine until the oil temperature is above
120°F (49°C).
•
Park the vehicle on relatively level ground.
•
Turn the engine off and cycle the ignition back to the
RUN position. Wait four minutes with the engine off,
and the ignition in the RUN position.
•
Start the engine and the new oil level will be avail-
able in the Vehicle Information menu (accessible via
the navigation buttons on the steering wheel).
NOTE:
•
If there has not been a notable change in the oil
level since the previous reading, there may not be
any notification or change in the display after the
system has taken another reading.
•
The oil level system takes measurements only while
the engine is off, has warm oil, and the vehicle is
parked on reasonably level ground. In order to get a
consistent oil level reading the ignition must be in
the RUN position for four minutes, however the sys-
tem may occasionally take readings with the key
OFF during normal usage.
•
If you have added a quart of oil and the indicator is
not reading 3/4 or full, please contact an authorized
dealer for service.
WARNING!
Be aware the oil cap may be hot. Please use suitable
gloves. WARNING: risk of burns!
CAUTION!
Do not to add too much oil. Overfilling the oil may
damage the engine.
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
•
After adding oil to the engine, always reinstall the oil
cap securely by rotating clockwise until it stops.
Never run the engine without the oil fill cap as this
could cause an oil leak.
•
Because the oil level is automatically detected only
when the engine has been off and restarted (after
four minutes), the system cannot immediately
detect a sudden drop in oil level while driving (for
example, if the oil pan starts to leak due to damage
during an off-road event).
CAUTION!
If the “Critically Low or Critically High” oil level
warning light is illuminated, the following steps
should be taken:
•
Critically Low: add two quarts of manufacturer
specified oil as soon as possible
page 334.
Continuing to operate the vehicle with “Critically
Low” oil level may damage the engine.
•
Critically High: contact an authorized dealer for
service. Continuing to operate the vehicle with
“Critically High” oil level may damage the engine.
Do not use any oils that are not manufacturer speci-
fied and API approved.
Used engine oil and oil filters contain substances
which are harmful to the environment. When oil and
filters are changed contact an authorized dealer and
dispose of in a safe and responsible manner.
CHECKING OIL LEVEL 5.7L & 6.4L
ENGINES
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after
a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
•
Crosshatched zone.
•
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
•
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end
of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
•
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to
the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The instrument cluster display will indicate when the
washer fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low
fluid level, the Low Washer Fluid Warning Light will turn
on and the "Washer Fluid Low" message will be
displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check
the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade perfor-
mance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that
meets or exceeds the temperature range of your cli-
mate. This rating information can be found on most
washer fluid containers.
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as engine
oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc. to minimize spillage
onto top of engine. Any excess fluid that is spilled onto
the top of the engine should be removed using com-
pressed air or absorbent cloth.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free bat-
tery. Water will never have to be added, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
8
WARNING!
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immedi-
ately with large amounts of water. Refer to Jump
Starting Procedure
page 271.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts
and connections however, the pressures generated
by these machines is such that complete protection
against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
may void your warranty and could result in civil penal-
ties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids
page 334.
NOTE:
Hemi engines at times can tick right after startup and
then quiet down after approximately 30 seconds. This is
normal and will not harm the engine. This characteristic
can be caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the
vehicle is started then shut off after driving a short dis-
tance. Upon restarting, you may experience a ticking
sound. Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused
for an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended
oil changes or extended idling. If the engine continues
to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by
the API. The manufacturer only recommends API trade-
mark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies
0W-40 and 5W-40 engine oil.
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
bers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection
dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered prod-
uct and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® filters should be
used. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is unavailable only
use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals page 278.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is neces-
sary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before starting
the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® filters
should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. With suitable tool fully loosen fasteners on the
engine air cleaner filter cover.
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover on the outside
edge and push inboard to detach hinge to access
the engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the hous-
ing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter inspec-
tion surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the
housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Tighten the fasteners on the engine air cleaner filter
assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
8
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover
lid screws or damage to the cover may result.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This service
should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a
performance test. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty
information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance
with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed
by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG com-
pressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter Replacement
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following proce-
dure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open, remove the
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compart-
ment door. Lift the clip out of glove compartment
door and release into dash panel.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment
door toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the
glove compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE:
When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
Left Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
4. There are glove compartment travel stops on both
sides of the glove compartment door, angle the
glove compartment in order to allow each side travel
stop to release the glove compartment from the
dash panel.
5. Pull out on the access door release tab and then
pull down from the top to remove the cabin air filter
access door from the vehicle.
6. Push the outside retaining tabs towards the cabin
air filter cover to release the cover from the HVAC
housing.
7. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out
of the housing.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Door
Cabin Air Filter Access Door
1 — Access Door Release Tab
2 — Cabin Air Filter Access Door
Cabin Air Filter Cover
1 — Cabin Air Filter Cover
2 — Retaining Tabs
Cabin Air Filter
1 — Cabin Air Filter
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
8
8. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage into
the HVAC housing.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indi-
cate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
9. Align the lower tabs on the access panel and then
push the top in to lock it securely back into the dash
panel.
10. Angle the door to get the glove compartment travel
stops back inside the dash panel.
11. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the door
hinge.
12. Reattach the glove compartment tension tether by
inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment
and sliding the clip away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT
INSPECTION
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks
that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace
the belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not
across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running
along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt
replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe
glazing.
Conditions that would require replacement:
•
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from
belt body)
•
Rib or belt wear
•
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
•
Belt slips
•
Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
•
Belt broken (identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
•
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle ser-
viced at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease,
such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and wear.
Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts con-
cerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and
a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline,
etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these condi-
tions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
•
Wear or uneven edges
•
Foreign material
•
Hardening or cracking
•
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the windshield.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the wiper
blade.
3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper
blade until it snaps into place.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
2. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grab
the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper
arm with your left hand. With your right hand, hold
the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm past its stop (far enough to unsnap
the wiper blade pivot from the receptacle on the end
of the wiper arm).
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap.
Wiper Arm And Blade
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Button
3 — Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
8
3. Still holding the bottom end of the wiper blade,
move the wiper blade upward and away from the
wiper arm to disengage.
4. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of
the wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper
blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into
place.
3. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust sys-
tem; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain Car-
bon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odor-
less. Breathing it can make you unconscious and
can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO
page 258.
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy
the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions
control device and may seriously reduce engine
performance and cause serious damage to the
engine.
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Con-
tinued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is
important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Ser-
vice, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
•
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission
is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing
the vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
•
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised.
The fan starts automatically and may start at any
time, whether the engine is running or not.
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to
the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled
and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON
position.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming
to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front
of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from
a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connec-
tion at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect
the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM
IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 278.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to Engine Fluids And Lubricants page 334.
NOTE:
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is
different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT
engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or antirust products, as they may not be com-
patible with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with pro-
pylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
•
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool-
ant is needed to be added to the system please con-
tact an authorized dealer.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
8
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
•
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
•
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the
vehicle is operated.
•
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as
engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc. to minimize
spillage onto top of engine. Any excess fluid that is
spilled onto the top of the engine should be
removed using compressed air or absorbent cloth.
•
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool-
ant is needed to be added to the system, please
contact a local authorized dealer.
•
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended
and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT
and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
an authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
WARNING!
•
Do not open a hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground, clean up any ground spills
immediately. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emer-
gency assistance immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there
is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
•
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant additions are required,
the cooling system should be pressure tested for
leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a mini-
mum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle over-
flow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs
may result in unsatisfactory engine cooling perfor-
mance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 278.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high
brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and pos-
sible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master
Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
Brake System Warning Light is on. If necessary, add
fluid to bring level within the designated marks on the
side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be
sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid
level should be checked when pads are replaced. If the
brake fluid is abnormally low, check the system for
leaks.
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid
page 335. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the origi-
nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in an open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
•
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake fail-
ure. This could result in a collision.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
8
its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore
the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using special
service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life.
Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission
fluid
page 335. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmis-
sion; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder.
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than
1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft-lb (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than
1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft-lb (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
page 335.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly
should be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect
the fluid level.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom-
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is
15 to 25 ft-lb (20 to 34 N·m).
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
page 335.
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
•
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating
as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with
another fuse of higher amp rating. The use of a
fuse with a rating other than indicated may result
in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any
other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit
breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper
fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
•
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the igni-
tion is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
•
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
•
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result
in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
8
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located on the pas-
senger side of the engine compartment, behind the head-
lamp. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses,
relays, and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse
and component may be stamped on the inside cover, oth-
erwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the
inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
CAUTION!
When installing the Power Distribution Center cover, it
is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the Power Distribution Center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
Power Distribution Center
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Crank Batt
F02 80 Amp Gray – Elec Pwr Str #1
F03 500 Amp Gray – Starter
F04 250 Amp Gray – Alternator
F05 80 Amp Gray – Elec Pwr Str #2
F06 Shunt – Aux Battery *
F07 100 Amp Gray – Rad Fan
F08 – – Spare
F09 80 Amp Gray – IPDC
F10 150 Amp Gray – RPDC
F11 150 Amp Gray – PCR *
F12 – – Spare
F13 40 Amp Green – Starter
F14 – 10 Amp Red GNMM */ VPMS *
F15 – 10 Amp Red ECM *
F16 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster
F17A – 10 Amp Red EPS
F17B – 10 Amp Red ATMM *
F18 – – Spare
F19 30 Amp Pink – BSM #2 Valves *
F20 – – Spare
F21 – – Spare
F22 – – Spare
F23A – 10 Amp Red ECM / PPU*/MGU*/BSM/SLM
F23B – 10 Amp Red AIR SUSPENSION / ELSD-RR / EPS
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F24 – 20 Amp Blue XFR Fuel Pump *
F25 – – SPARE
F26 50 Amp Red – BSM Motor #2 *
F27 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
F28 – – Spare
F29 – – Spare
F30 – – Spare
F31 40 Amp Green – BCM Feed #3
F32 – – Spare
F33 30 Amp Pink – PWR Side Steps *
F34 – – Spare
F35 – – Spare
F36 50 Amp Red – BCM Feed #1
F37 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
F38 50 Amp Red – BCM Feed #2
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 5 Amp Tan Batt Snsr #1
F41 – 20 Amp Yellow CADM MAP *
F42 – – Spare
F43 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F44 – – Spare
F45 – – Spare
F46 – 5 Amp Tan Batt Snsr #2*
F47 – 10 Amp Red BPCM
F48 – 10 Amp Red CVPAM
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F49 – 30 Amp Pink Air Suspension Valves
F50 – – Spare
F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pmp * / FPCM *
F52 – – Spare
F53 – – Spare
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Headlamp LT
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare
F57 – – Spare
F58 – – Spare
F59 50 Amp Red – Air Suspension
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62 – – Spare
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Camera Washer Frt
F64 – – Spare
F65 – 15 Amp Blue ACT Grille Shutter / ACT Air Dam / Coolant Valve LCVM *
F66 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
F67 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / Switchable Engine Mount / BSM #2
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow Headlamp RT
F69 – – Spare
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow IGN Coil * / IGN Cap */ Fuel Inj */ ISCM *
F71 – – Spare
F72 – – Spare
F73 – – Spare
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F74 – 5 Amp Tan MGU *
F75 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F76 – – Spare
F77 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM SBW
F78 – 20 Amp Yellow Short Runner Valve / ECM
F79 – 15 Amp Red
Fuel INJ * / Surge Solenoid * / Oil Sensor*/AirValve*/
OBD Bypass*/O2Heaters *
F80 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F81 40 Amp Green – BCM Feed #4
F82 – – Spare
F83 – – Spare
F84 – – Spare
F85 – 10 Amp Red PCR *
F86 50 Amp Red – BSM Feed 1
F87 – – Spare
F88 50 Amp Red – BSM Feed 2
F89 – – Spare
F90 – – Spare
F91 – – Spare
F92 20 Amp Blue – Front De-Icer *
F93 25 Amp Clear – Fuel Pmp *
F94 – 10 Amp Red A/C Comp Clutch
F95 – – Spare
F96 – – Spare
F97 – – Spare
F98A – 15 Amp Blue Cooling Fan *
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F98B – 15 Amp Blue Pmp Battery Cooling *
F99 – – Spare
F100 – – Spare
F101 – – Spare
F102 25 Amp Clear – Fuel Pmp *
F103 – – Spare
F104 – – Spare
F105A – – Spare
F105B – 15 Amp Blue LTR Coolant Pump
Interior Power Distribution Center
The Interior Power Distribution Center is located under
the driver’s instrument panel. This center contains car-
tridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers.
NOTE:
Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an autho-
rized dealer.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 – – Spare
Interior Power Distribution Center Location
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F03 – 15 Amp Blue MOD Seat Heater Frt (Steering Wheel) *
F04 – 10 Amp Red Night Vision Module / Driver Monitoring Camera (DMC)
F05 – – Spare
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
F08 – 10 Amp Red
Automatic Gearbox Shifter Module (AGSM) / Steering Column Lock /
HUD
F09 – – Spare
F10 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Motor
F11 – – Spare
F12 – 20 Amp Yellow Assy Cigar Lighter
F13 – 10 Amp Red
Assy Mirror Inside Rearview / Sunroof Single - Dual Pane / Port UC1
Dual USB RR / Interior Monitoring Camera
F14 – 10 Amp Red Refrigerator Box / In Vehicle Safe *
F15A – – Spare
F15B – – Spare
F16 – 10 Amp Red MOD ORC
F17 – – Spare
F18 – – Spare
F19 – – Spare
F20 – 10 Amp Red Overhead Console Assy (OHC) W/Sunshade / Intrusion Module
F21 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake - Aftermarket
F22 – – Spare
F23 – – Spare
F24 – – Spare
F25 – – Spare
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F26 – – Spare
F27 – – Spare
F28 – – Spare
F29 – – Spare
F30 – – Spare
F31 – – Spare
F32 – 10 Amp Red
MOD ICS Switch Bank / SW Bank Upper / SW EPB / Aux Switch Bank
Module (ASBM) / Mod HVAC Cntrl Frt / Humidity Rain Light Sensor
(HRLS)
F33 – 15 Amp Blue
Transfer case SW / SW Bank Lower / Mod ICS Switch Bank Rear /
Climate Control Display / Suspension SW *
F34 – – Spare
F35 – 10 Amp Red IRCAM Heater
F36 – – Spare
F37 – – Spare
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
F40 – – Spare
F41A – – Spare
F41B – – Spare
F42A – – Spare
F42B – 10 Amp Red MOD HVAC Control Frt
F43A – – Spare
F43B – – Spare
F44 – 15 Amp Blue MOD Cluster CCN / MOD SGW (Cybersecurity)
F45 30 Amp Pink – MOD Inverter 150W
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F46 – – Spare
F47A – – Spare
F47B – – Spare
F48A – – Spare
F48B – – Spare
F49 – 7.5 Amp Brown MOD RF HUB / Module Ignition (MD KIN)
F50A – 10 Amp Red Port UCI Dual USB Rear
F50B – 10 Amp Red Port Diagnostics1&2
F51A – – Spare
F51B – – Spare
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CMCM (Radio)
F54A – – Spare
F54B – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare
F57 – – Spare
F58 – – Spare
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62A – – Spare
F62B – – Spare
F63A – 15 Amp Blue
Port UC1 Dual USB Frt / Wireless Charging Pad MOD (WCPM) - High/
Premium Only
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F63B – 15 Amp Blue
Telematics Box Module (TBM) / Mod-DCSD /Mod FPDM / RSE Video
USB Console Frt
F64A – 10 Amp Red MOD ORC
F64B – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)
F65 – 5 Amp Tan MOD SGW (Cybersecurity)
F66 – – Spare
CB1 – – Spare
CB2 – – Spare
CB3 – – Spare
CB4 – – Spare
CB5 – – Spare
CB6 – – Spare
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
8
Rear Power Distribution Center
The Rear Power Distribution Center is located behind a trim cover in the rear driver’s side quarter panel. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit
breakers. The following chart corresponds to the fuses inside.
Rear PDC Location
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F05 150 Amp Gray – Underhood PDC Battery Feed
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
F08 – – Spare
F09 – – Spare
F10 – – Spare
F11 – – Spare
F12 – – Spare
F13 30 Amp Pink – Air Compressor (Tire Inflator) *
F14 25 Amp Clear – MTR Sunshade Sunroof
F15A – – Spare
F15B – 10 Amp Red Hands Free Liftgate / Rear Window Switches / MOD HVAC Cntrl Rr
F16 – – Spare
F17 – – Spare
F18 25 Amp Clear – Power Liftgate Module
F19A – 10 Amp Red L2+ Driver Alert Lighting Module
F19B – 10 Amp Red Animation Lighting RR-LT
F20A – 15 Amp Blue Central ASAS Decision Module (CADM) - LO
F20B – – Spare
F21A – – Spare
F21B – 10 Amp Red Sunroof - Dual Pane 2nd & 3rd Row Seat SW-Illumination
F22 – – Spare
F23 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Entertainment (Driver / Passenger)
F24 – – Spare
F25 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Passenger
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F26 – – Spare
F27 – – Spare
F28 30 Amp Pink – MOD Memory / Power Seat (Passenger Frt)
F29A – 10 Amp Red Animation Lighting RR-RT
F29B – 10 Amp Red Animation Lighting RR-LT
F30 30 Amp Pink – MOD Memory / Power Seat (Driver Frt)
F31 – – Spare
F32 – – Spare
F33 – – Spare
F34 30 Amp Pink – MOD Door MUX Driver
F35 25 Amp Clear – Integrated Trailer Tow Module #2
F36A – 10 Amp Red Intelligent Event Base Lighting Module
F36B – – Spare
F37 25 Amp Clear – Integrated Trailer Tow Module #1
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 30 Amp Green Mod Audio Amplifier #1A
F41 – – Spare
F42A – – Spare
F42B – – Spare
F43 – – Spare
F44A – 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Power Outlet Cargo Area (Ign)
F44B – 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Power Outlet Cargo Area (Battery)
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CRSM (Heated Seat RR RT)
F46 30 Amp Pink – Folding Seat Module 3rd Row Feed #1 *
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – – Spare
F50 – 15 Amp Blue
Seat Massage Driver Mod (SSMD) / Seat Massage Passenger Mod
(SSMP) *
F51 – – Spare
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CRSM (Heat Seat RR LT) *
F53 30 Amp Pink – Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Rear #1 *
F54 – – Spare
F55 30 Amp Pink – Folding Seat Modules 3rd Row Feed #2 *
F56 – – Spare
F57 – 10 Amp Red
Mod HVAC RR / Mod Occupant Classic / CVPAM / Mod Parktronics /
ITCM
F58 – 15 Amp Blue
3rd Row Additional USB charge (Only LT - RT) / Port Pwr USB Console
UBS (CH Only)
F59 – – Spare
F60 25 Amp Clear – RR_HVAC Blower
F61 – – Spare
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Frt (Driver) *
F63 30 Amp Pink – Assy Trailer Tow Receptacle B+
F64 – – Spare
F65 – – Spare
F66 20 Amp Blue – MOD Door MUX Passenger Rear - Smart Motor
F67 – 30 Amp Green MOD Audio Amplifier #1B
F68 – – Spare
F69 – 20 Amp Yellow L2+ Central ASAS Decision Module (CADM) MID *
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F70 – 10 Amp Red Video Routing Module (VRM)
F71 – – Spare
F72 – – Spare
F73 – – Spare
F74 – – Spare
F75 – – Spare
F76 – – Spare
F77 – – Spare
F78 – – Spare
F79 – – Spare
F80 – – Spare
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Frt (PASS) *
F82 – 10 Amp Red
Animation Lighting RR / Air Compressor (Tire Inflator) / Animation
Lighting Liftgate Taillamp
F83 – – Spare
F84 – – Spare
F85 – – Spare
F86 – 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Support Driver & Passenger SW *
F87 – – Spare
F88 20 Amp Blue – MOD Door MUX Driver Rear - Smart Motor
CB1 – 20 Amp Blue Power Outlet RR
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part
Numbers
Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. In the event of
a light malfunction, please see an authorized dealer for
LED replacement.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the follow-
ing information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Num-
bers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures,
and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from
this tire size designation. Example:
215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall pre-
ceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1—
US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
8
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
•
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
•
"R" means radial construction, or
•
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 1 8 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
•
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
•
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
•
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
•
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
•
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equip-
ment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
8
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driv-
er’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if
you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold
tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Load-
ing Information placard
page 163.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing
page 163.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lb” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lbs passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(5)
Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
•
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
8
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
•
Safety
•
Fuel Economy
•
Tread Wear
•
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
•
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
•
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
•
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause
the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side
door.
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated.
•
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi
(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal
pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
8
very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe oper-
ating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires
could cause them to fail. You could have a serious
collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maxi-
mum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
•
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
•
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
•
The puncture is no greater than a quarter of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size
and service description (Load Index and Speed Sym-
bol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of infla-
tion pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to
as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when
the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96
kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it
has limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
When a run flat tire is changed after driving under a
Run Flat mode (14 psi [96 kPa]) condition, please
replace the TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be
reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle
on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
For more information
page 229.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
For further information
page 274.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds con-
tinuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
tire should be replaced.
For further information
page 321.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying fac-
tors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across
the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will
reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
•
Distance driven
•
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and perfor-
mance when replacement is needed. For more informa-
tion
page 320. Refer to the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the
size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed
Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equip-
ment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index and
Speed Symbol of a tire
page 314.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes
(Continued)
WARNING!
to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in seri-
ous injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capac-
ity, other than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All Season tires can
be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation
on the tire sidewall. Use All Season tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
8
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry con-
ditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more infor-
mation, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent
in size and type to the original equipment
tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; fail-
ure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized
tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
a compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire desig-
nated for temporary emergency use
page 170.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the
tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this
option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recom-
mended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the let-
ter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a con-
ventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire
and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a con-
ventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare
tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full-Size Spare — If Equipped
The Full-Size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire
on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tempo-
rary use Full-Size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since
it is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and rein-
stall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driv-
er’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equip-
ment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on
your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of
vehicle control.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their
luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the
same soap solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the sur-
faces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt
ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or
sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage
the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and auto-
matic car washes may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of
tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to
prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treat-
ment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
8
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the brake components.
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow
traction devices are recommended. Follow these rec-
ommendations to guard against damage:
•
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the snow traction device
manufacturer.
•
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with
the snow traction device.
•
Please see the following table for recommended tire
size, axle and snow traction device:
Wagoneer
4x2
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum pro-
jection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
Series 1
Rear
275/65R18
275/55R20
S Class
Series 2
Series 3
275/55R20
4x4
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum pro-
jection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
Series 1
Series 2
Rear
275/65R18
275/55R20
S Class
Series 3 275/55R20
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Grand Wagoneer
4x2
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum pro-
jection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
Series 1
Rear
275/55R20
S ClassSeries 2
Series 3
4x4
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum pro-
jection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
Series 1
Rear
275/55R20
S ClassSeries 2
Series 3
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredict-
able handling. You could lose control and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
•
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components,
it is important that only traction devices in good
condition are used. Broken devices can cause seri-
(Continued)
CAUTION!
ous damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
•
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
•
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation, operat-
ing speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
•
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare
tire.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
8
TIRE ROTATION
RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate
at different loads and perform different steering, han-
dling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they
wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute
to a smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 278.
More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The
reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be cor-
rected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE:
The premium Tire Pressure Monitoring System will auto-
matically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must con-
form to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart signifi-
cantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and
climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on speci-
fied government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the high-
est), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive tem-
perature can lead to sudden tire fail-
ure. The grade C corresponds to a level
of performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Exces-
sive speed, under-inflation, or exces-
sive loading, either separately or in
(Continued)
WARNING!
combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following steps
to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
•
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
•
Before you store your vehicle or keep it out of ser-
vice (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system
is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
AGENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other sea-
sons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other
extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint,
metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corro-
sion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
•
Stone and gravel impact
•
Insects, tree sap and tar
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
BODY AND UNDERBODY
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and there-
fore different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
8
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a
mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely
with water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accu-
mulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen
Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to pro-
tect your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch
the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept
clear and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or simi-
lar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as
possible.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz-
ers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials
are well packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon
as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up
paint to match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical sol-
vents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Pro-
gram facility for inspection.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
•
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away
immediately.
•
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
The leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather uphol-
stery and should be removed promptly with a damp
cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be taken to
avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid.
Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, sol-
vents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show
any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more
so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and the manufacturer recommends Mopar®
total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean
the leather seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery,
as damage to the upholstery may result.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on
the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray
cleaner directly on the mirror.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on a label located on the left front cor-
ner of the instrument panel pad, visible from outside of
the vehicle through the windshield.
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. How-
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop,
and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that
required with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 ft-lb
(176 N·m)
M14x1.50 22mm
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
insert it half way).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer
or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to
be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly
tightened.
Windshield VIN Label Location
Wheel Mounting Surface
330
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the
engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the
engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see a
dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane
number lower than recommended can cause engine
failure and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience
these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
3.0L HIGH OUTPUT ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations, provide optimal fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality unleaded
premium gasoline having a posted octane
number of 91 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 91 or higher octane premium gasoline is required
in this engine.
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance when using high-
quality unleaded gasoline having an octane
range of 87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of 89 octane plus gasoline is recommended for
optimum performance and fuel economy.
6.4L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations, provide optimal fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality unleaded
premium gasoline having a posted octane
number of 91 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 91 or higher octane premium gasoline is required
in these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner-
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corro-
sion and stability additives are recommended. Using
gasolines that have these additives will help improve
fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to fur-
ther aide in minimizing engine and fuel sys-
tem deposits. When available, the usage of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
for gum and varnish removal may contain active sol-
vents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel sys-
tem gasket and diaphragm materials.
Torque Patterns
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 331
9
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Use of these blends may result in starting and driv-
ability problems, damage critical fuel system compo-
nents, cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as
they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains
greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX
FUEL VEHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gaso-
line with higher ethanol content may void the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
•
Operate in a lean mode.
•
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
•
Poor engine performance.
•
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
•
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
MODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Com-
pressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT)
IN GASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that
is blended into some gasolines to increase octane.
Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system perfor-
mance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends that gasoline without MMT be used in your
vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indi-
cated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask
the gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California refor-
mulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control
system.
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most
of these products contain high concentrations of
methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
332 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 26.5 Gallons 100 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.0L HO Engine 7.5 Quarts 7.1 Liters
5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
6.4L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.0L HO Engine 16.6 Quarts 15.7 Liters
3.0L HO Engine Intercooler 2.9 Quarts 2.7 Liters
5.7L Engine 17 Quarts 16.0 Liters
6.4L Engine 18.8 Quarts 17.8 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 333
9
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of
the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Coolant — Intercooler
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of
the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 3.0L HO Engine
We recommend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil,
which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-A0921.
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-40 engine oil can be used but must have the API
Donut trademark with a certification level of API-SP or later. API-SN+ is also
acceptable.
CAUTION!
Usage of earlier API certification levels (such as API-SN or prior) can result in engine
damage and is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil — 5.7L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full syn-
thetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
page 286.
Engine Oil — 6.4L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-12633. Equivalent
full synthetic SAE 0W-40 engine oil can be used but must have the API Donut trade-
mark
page 286.
Fuel Selection – 3.0L HO Engine 91 Octane or Higher (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol
(Do not use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 6.4L Engine 91 Octane or Higher (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
334 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF8&9Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Fail-
ure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® Mobile LT.
Axle Differential (Front) We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) - With Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Electronic Limited Slip Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier.
Axle Differential (Rear) - With Mechanical Limited Slip Differential
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Mechanical Limited Slip Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 335
9
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's ser-
vice history. This can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let
the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements
when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high qual-
ity service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed cor-
rectly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you
are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or
owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if
you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable
to resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's
Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer center
should include the following information:
•
Owner's name and address
•
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
•
Authorized dealer name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (833) 667-4825
WAGONEER CLIENT SERVICES
CANADA
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: 1-844-472-6301 (844-GRAND01)
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN
ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: 833 (667) 4825
336
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
HEARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA
US LLC has installed special Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with FCA
US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service
offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users,
dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to
connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans are the
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you pur-
chased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the
mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service contract,
call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
For Canadian residents, you may have purchased addi-
tional coverage with an extended service contract. FCA
Canada Inc. stands fully behind its service contracts.
Be sure that the one you buy is a genuine Canada Inc.
service contract. We are not responsible for other com-
panies’ contracts. If you purchased a contract other
than a genuine FCA Canada Inc. service contract and
you have a problem, you will have to contact the admin-
istrator of that contract for resolution.
If you have any questions about the service contract,
call the FCA's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-844-472-6301 (844-GRAND01) English /
1-844-472-6301 (844-GRAND01) French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you
may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you
require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools,
and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted
with the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi-
sions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for
further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi-
sions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/en/
for further information.
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for further
information.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep
it operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
WASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or
cause injury or death, you should imme-
diately inform the National Highway Traf-
fic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
Scan me
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 337
10
NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-
vidual problems between you, an
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety defect to the Canadian
government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investi-
gations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a com-
plete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or
components and is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make
it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step trouble-
shooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic
tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a digital copy of your Service or Diagnostic Pro-
cedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
Or visit:
www.techauthority.com to order physical copies of
Owner’s Manuals (US).
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty Infor-
mation Books can be ordered through Archway at:
•
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innova-
tion, Science and Economic Development applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est sus-
ceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
338 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes.................330
Active Driving Assist System ............135
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) .126, 127
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .........294
AddingFuel....................162
Additives,Fuel...................331
Adjust
Down......................37
Forward ....................37
Rearward....................37
Up.......................37
Adjustable Pedals..................47
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ...............242
Air Bag Warning Light ...........240,242
Driver Knee Air Bag ..............245
Enhanced Accident Response .......248,277
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ..........277
FrontAirBag .................242
If Deployment Occurs .............247
Knee Impact Bolsters .............245
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ........248
Maintenance .................248
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ........241
Side Air Bags .................245
Transporting Pets ...............258
AirBagLight.................240,259
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ....287
Air Conditioner Maintenance............288
Air Conditioner Refrigerant.............288
Air Conditioner System ..............288
Air Conditioning
Rear......................66
Air Conditioning Filter .............68,287
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...........68
Air Conditioning System...............67
AirFilter......................287
Air Pressure
Tires .....................319
Alarm
Arm The System ..............23,24
Disarm The System ...............24
Rearm The System ...............24
Security Alarm .................103
Alarm System
Security Alarm ...............23, 24
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.....................11
Amazon FireTV ................206, 210
Amazon FireTV Built-in...............206
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)..........293, 333
Disposal ...................294
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...........217
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..............103
Apps .......................205
Arming System
Security Alarm .................23
Assist, Hill Start ..................222
Audio Systems (Radio) ...............179
AutoDownPowerWindows.............77
AutoHold................106,107,114
AutomaticFoldingMirrors..............50
Automatic Headlights ................56
Automatic High Beams ...............55
Automatic Tailgate Release .............82
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
........67
A
utomatic Transmission ...........110,116
AddingFluid..................296
Fluid And Filter Change ............296
Fluid Change .................296
Fluid Level Check ............295, 296
FluidType ................296, 335
Special Additives ...............295
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode .....118
AutoPark.....................111
Auxiliary Driving Systems .............224
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .......74
Auxiliary Power Outlet ................74
AUXPort......................72
AxleFluid.....................335
B
Battery ...................101,285
Charging System Light .............101
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ..........18
Battery Saver Feature................57
Belts, Seat ....................259
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...........290
B-Pillar Location ..................316
Brake Assist System ................219
Brake Control System, Electronic ..........218
Brake Fluid .................295, 335
Brake System ................295, 330
Anti-Lock (ABS) ................330
Fluid Check ..................295
Master Cylinder ................295
Parking....................113
Warning Light .................101
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...........116
Bulb Replacement.................313
Bulbs,Light....................260
339
11
C
Camera, Night Vision ...............157
Camera, Rear ................156,160
Capacities, Fluid .................333
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ..................281
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..........294
Carbon Monoxide Warning.............260
Cargo Area Cover ................83, 84
Cargo Compartment ................83
Light......................83
Cargo Light .....................83
Cargo Tie-Downs ..................83
Car Washes ....................328
Cellular Phone ..................216
Center Console Cooler ...............71
Center Console Safe ................71
Center Console Safe If Equipped
........71
Chains, Tire ....................324
Chart, Tire Sizing .................314
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .109
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety..........258
Checks, Safety ..................258
Child Restraint ..................249
Child Restraints
Booster Seats .................251
Child Seat Installation .............257
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .....255
Infant And Child Restraints ...........250
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ........253
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ....252
Older Children And Child Restraints ......250
Seating Positions ...............251
Child Safety Locks .................29
Clean Air Gasoline .................331
Cleaning
Wheels ....................323
Climate Control ...................61
Automatic ...................61
Cold Weather Operation ..............112
Compact Spare Tire ................322
Contract, Service .................337
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ........294
Cooling System ..................293
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........294
Coolant Level .................294
Cooling Capacity ...............333
Disposal Of Used Coolant ...........294
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............293
Inspection ................293, 294
PointsToRemember .............295
Pressure Cap .................294
Radiator Cap .................294
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .293, 333, 334
Corrosion Protection ................327
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...........126
Cruise Light .................107,108
Customer Assistance ...............336
Customer Programmable Features .........179
Cybersecurity ...................179
D
Daytime Running Lights ...............55
Defroster, Windshield ...............259
De-Icer, Remote Start ................23
Deluxe Security Alarm................24
Diagnostic System, Onboard ............108
DigitalRearviewMirror...............48
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ...............284,285
Disabled Vehicle Towing ..............275
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........294
Door Ajar...................101,102
Door Ajar Light ................101,102
Door Locks ...................25, 29
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ....29
Doors .......................25
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ...............32
Driving......................176
E
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .......74
Electric Brake Control System ...........218
Anti-Lock Brake System ............217
Electronic Roll Mitigation .........219,224
Electric Parking Brake ...............113
Electric Remote Mirrors ...............50
Electronic Range Select (ERS) ...........118
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)......126
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........219
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ......102
Emergency Braking ................229
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release ........163
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...........272
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ..........274
Hazard Warning Flasher ............261
Jacking ....................263
Jump Starting .................270
Emission Control System Maintenance .......109
Engine....................281,283
Air Cleaner ..................287
Block Heater .................112
Break-In Recommendations ..........113
Checking Oil Level ............284,285
Compartment............281,282, 283
Compartment Identification ........281,282
Cooling....................293
340 INDEX
Exhaust Gas Caution .............260
Fails To Start .................112
Flooded, Starting ...............112
Fuel Requirements ............331,333
Jump Starting .................270
Oil....................286, 333
Oil Filler Cap .................281
OilFilter....................287
Oil Selection ............286, 333, 334
Oil Synthetic ..................287
Starting ....................110
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ....248,277
Ethanol ......................332
Exhaust Gas Cautions ...............260
Exhaust System ...............260, 292
Exterior Lights ..............54,260, 313
F
FamCam System .................157
Filters
Air Cleaner ..................287
Air Conditioning ...........68,287,288
Engine Oil ...................287
Engine Oil Disposal ..............287
FireTV.......................210
Flashers .....................261
Hazard Warning ................261
Turn Signals ...............107,260
Flash-To-Pass....................56
Flooded Engine Starting ..............112
Fluid Capacities ..................333
Fluid Leaks ....................260
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .....................295
Engine Oil ................284,285
Fluids And Lubricants ...............335
Fold-Flat Seats ...................32
Forward Collision Warning .............227
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............261
Four Wheel Drive...............119,120
Operation ...................119
System ....................119
Four Wheel Drive Operation ............119
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..............274
Front Axle (Differential) ..............296
Fuel........................331
Additives ...................331
CleanAir ...................331
Ethanol ....................332
Gasoline ...................331
Materials Added ................331
Methanol ...................332
Octane Rating .................331
Requirements ..............331,333
Specifications .................334
Tank Capacity .................333
Fueling......................162
Fully Automated ParkSense Active Park Assist . . .148
Fuses .......................297
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..........51
Gasoline, Clean Air ................331
Gasoline, (Fuel) ..................331
Gasoline, Reformulated ..............331
Gear Ranges ...................117
Glass Cleaning ..................329
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............164
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ............164
GVWR.......................163
H
Hazard Warning Flashers .............261
Headlights
Automatic ...................56
Cleaning ...................327
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ......55
Lights On Reminder ...............57
OnWithWipers.................56
Passing ....................56
Head Restraints ..................42
Heads Up Display..................98
Head Up Display ..................98
Heated Mirrors ...................51
Heated Seats ....................41
Heated Steering Wheel ...............30
Heater, Engine Block ...............112
Hill Descent Control ................221
Hill Descent Control Indicator ...........221
Hill Start Assist ..................222
Hitches
TrailerTowing.................167
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ..........51
Hood Prop .....................80
Hood Release ...................80
I
Ignition.......................20
Key Fob Battery Low Or Dead ..........20
KeyFobNotDetected..............20
Keyless Ignition .................20
Keyless Push Button ..............20
Push Button Ignition ..............20
Switch .....................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ..............20
InsideRearviewMirror.............48, 261
Instrument Cluster .............89, 91, 92
INDEX 341
11
Display...................92, 93
MenuItems ..................96
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ..........329
Integrated Trailer Brake Control ..........170
Interior And Instrument Lights ............58
Interior Appearance Care .............328
Interior Lights ...................58
InteriorMonitoringCamera ............157
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) .........60
Inverter
Power .....................75
J
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions .......264
Jacking Instructions ................267
Jack Location ...................264
Jack Operation ..................267
Jump Starting ...................270
K
Key Fob
Arm The System ................23
Disarm The System ...............24
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........20
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .18
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ....20
KeylessEnter'nGo™...............110
Passive Entry ..................27
Passive Entry Programming ...........27
Keys........................17
Replacement ..................20
Sentry (Immobilizer) ..............20
KNOW & GO
..................9
L
Lane Change Assist .................57
LaneSense ....................153
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................235
Latches ......................260
Hood ......................80
Lead Free Gasoline ................331
Leaks, Fluid ....................260
LifeOfTires....................321
Liftgate.......................81
Closing.....................81
Hands-Free ...................82
Opening ....................81
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...........61
LightBulbs....................260
Lights.......................260
AirBag..................240,259
Automatic Headlights ..............56
Brake Assist Warning .............220
Brake Warning ................101
Bulb Replacement ...............313
Cargo .....................83
Cruise ..................107,108
Daytime Running ................55
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ............54
Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator . . .102
Exterior..................54,260
Hazard Warning Flasher ............261
Headlights On With Wipers ...........56
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..........55
Hill Descent Control Indicator .........221
Interior.....................58
Lights On Reminder ...............57
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ......104
Park....................56,107
Passing ....................56
Reading ....................58
Seat Belt Reminder ..............102
Security Alarm .................103
Service ....................313
Traction Control ................220
Turn Signals .............54, 107, 260
VanityMirror ..................49
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions ....102
Loading Vehicle ..................163
Tires .....................316
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ...........99
Load Shed Battery Saver On ............99
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........99
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ........99
Locks
Child Protection .................29
Manual .....................25
Power Door ...................26
Lubrication, Body .................290
Lug Nuts/Bolts ..................330
M
Maintenance ....................80
Maintenance Free Battery .............285
Maintenance Schedule ..............278
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . .104, 109
Manual
Park Release .................273
Service....................338
McIntosh.....................205
MediaHub.....................72
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ..........30
Memory Seat ....................30
Memory Seats And Radio ..............30
Methanol .....................332
Mirrors.......................48
Electric Remote .................50
342 INDEX
ExteriorFolding.................49
Heated .....................51
Outside .....................49
Rearview .................48,261
Vanity .....................49
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle.....................11
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...........229
Mopar Parts....................337
MP3 Control ....................72
Multi-Function Control Lever.............54
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ............113
NightVisionCamera................157
O
Occupant Restraints................233
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ...........331
Off-Road Pages ..................214
Oil Change Indicator ................95
Reset .....................95
Oil, Engine ....................286
Capacity ...................333
Checking ................284,285
Dipstick .................284,285
Disposal ...................287
Filter .....................287
Filter Disposal .................287
Identification Logo ...............286
Materials Added To ..............287
Pressure Warning Light ............102
Recommendation ............286, 333
Synthetic ...................287
Viscosity ...................333
Oil Filter, Change .................287
Oil Filter, Selection.................287
Oil Pressure Light .................102
Onboard Diagnostic System ............108
Operating Precautions ...............108
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ................338
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..............49
P
Pages, Off Road ..................214
Paint Care.....................327
Parking Brake ................103,113
ParkSense Active Park Assist ...........146
ParkSense System, Rear..............140
Passenger Screen .................201
Passive Entry ....................27
Pedals, Adjustable .................47
Permissions....................201
Pets .......................258
Phone Storage ...................70
Pinch Protection ..................80
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......316
Power
Brakes ....................330
Distribution Center (Fuses) .....298, 303, 308
Door Locks ...................26
Inverter.....................75
Mirrors.....................50
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........74
Seats ......................37
SideSteps...................26
Steering .................124,335
Sunroof ....................78
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ........29
Windows....................77
Power Seats
Down......................37
Forward ....................37
Rearward....................37
Up.......................37
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts..........239
Preparation For Jacking ..............264
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ...................239
Q
Quadra-Lift ....................121
Quadra-Trac ....................119
R
Radial Ply Tires ..................320
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)........294
Radio
Sound Setting .................196
Radio Operation ..................216
Radio Remote Controls ..............200
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ............60
Rear Air Conditioning ................66
Rear Axle (Differential)...............296
RearCamera.................156,160
RearCrossPath..................226
Rear ParkSense System ..............140
Rear Seat Entertainment .............206
Rear Seat Reminder ................217
Rear Wiper/Washer.................61
Recreational Towing ................173
Reformulated Gasoline ..............331
Refrigerant ....................288
Release, Hood ...................80
Reminder, Seat Belt ................234
INDEX 343
11
Remote Control
Starting System .................22
Remote Keyless Entry ................17
ArmTheAlarm .................23
Disarm The Alarm ................24
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .......200
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .............22
Remote Starting System ..............22
Replacement Bulbs ................313
Replacement Keys .................20
Replacement Tires ................321
Reporting Safety Defects .............337
Restraints, Child..................249
Restraints, Head ..................42
Roll Over Warning..................10
Roof Luggage Rack .................85
Rotation, Tires ..................326
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle............259
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...........260
Safety Defects, Reporting .............337
Safety, Exhaust Gas ................260
SafetyInformation,Tire..............313
SafetyTips....................258
Schedule, Maintenance ..............278
Screen, Passenger ................201
Seat Belt Reminder ................102
Seat Belts ..................234, 259
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ............236
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .....236
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .236
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .......239
Child Restraints ................249
Energy Management Feature .........239
Extender ...................238
Front Seat ................234, 235
Inspection ..................259
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .........235
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..............235
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .........236
Operating Instructions .............235
Pregnant Women ...............239
Pretensioners .................239
Rear Seat ...................235
Reminder ..............107,108,234
Seat Belt Extender ..............238
Seat Belt Pretensioner .............239
Seat Belt Reminder ..............108
Untwisting Procedure .............236
Seat Belts Maintenance ..............328
Seats ....................32,37,41
Adjustment .................32,37
Bolster .....................38
Easy Entry ...................39
Heated .....................41
Memory ....................30
RearFolding ..................32
Tilting .....................32
Vented.....................42
Ventilated ...................42
Second Row USB ..................74
Security Alarm ...............23,24,103
Arm The System ................23
Disarm The System ...............24
Selec-Terrain ...................120
Semi-Automatic ParkSense Active Park Assist . . .151
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..............20
Sentry Key Replacement ..............20
Service Assistance ................336
Service Contract..................337
Service Manuals .................338
Settings......................179
S
hifting......................115
Automatic Transmission .........115,116
Shoulder Belts ..................235
Side Steps, Power .................26
Signals, Turn .................107,260
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............324
SnowTires....................322
Spare Tire Removal ................266
Spare Tires ...............265, 322, 323
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ...............126, 127
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ............130
Cancel ....................127
Resume ....................127
Set......................126
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...........126
Starting ....................22, 110
Button .....................20
Cold Weather .................112
Engine Block Heater ..............112
Engine Fails To Start ..............112
Remote ....................22
Starting And Operating ..............110
Starting Procedures ................110
Steering ......................29
Power.....................124
TiltColumn...................29
Wheel, Heated .................30
Wheel, Tilt ...................29
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...........200
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . .200
Steps, Power Side .................26
Storage ......................69
Storage, Vehicle ..................327
Storing Your Vehicle ................327
Streaming ....................206
Sunglasses Storage.................70
344 INDEX
SunRoof....................78,80
SunVisor......................49
Surroundview Camera ...............160
Sway Control, Trailer ................224
Synthetic Engine Oil ................287
System, Remote Starting ..............22
T
Telescoping Steering Column ............29
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........67
Third Party Apps..................205
ThirdRowUSB...................74
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ...............83
Tilt Steering Column ................29
Tire And Loading Information Placard........316
TireMarkings...................313
Tires ...............260, 319, 322, 326
Aging (Life Of Tires) ..............321
Air Pressure ..................319
Chains ....................324
Changing ...................263
Compact Spare ................322
General Information ...........319,322
High Speed ..................319
Inflation Pressure ...............319
LifeOfTires..................321
Load Capacity .................316
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . .105, 229
Quality Grading ................326
Radial ....................320
Replacement .................321
Rotation ...................326
Safety..................313,319
Sizes .....................314
SnowTires ..................322
Spare Tires .............265, 322, 323
Spinning ...................320
TrailerTowing .................170
Tread Wear Indicators .............320
Wheel Nut Torque ...............330
TireSafetyInformation ..............313
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...........169
To Open Hood ...................80
Tow/Haul Mode ..................119
Towing.................106,164,275
Disabled Vehicle ................275
Guide.....................167
Recreational .................173
Weight ....................167
Towing Behind A Motorhome ............173
Traction Control ..................224
Traffic Sign Recognition System ..........134
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............224
TrailerTowing...................164
Hitches ....................167
Minimum Requirements ............169
Tips......................172
Trailer And Tongue Weight ...........169
Wiring.....................172
TrailerWeight...................167
Transfer Case ...................297
Fluid .....................335
Maintenance .................297
Transmission ...................116
Automatic ................116,295
Fluid .....................335
Maintenance .................295
Shifting....................115
Transporting Pets .................258
Tread Wear Indicators ...............320
Turn Signals ....................107
U
Uconnect .....................179
Uconnect Settings .................179
Customer Programmable Features ......27,29
Passive Entry Programming .........27,29
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ............326
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
..51
Unleaded Gasoline ................331
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..........236
USBPorts.....................72
V
VanityMirrors....................49
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........330
Vehicle Loading ...............163,316
Vehicle Maintenance ...............286
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..........11
Vehicle Security Alarm ...............23
VehicleSettings..................179
Vehicle Storage ..................327
VoiceCommand..................46
Voice Recognition System (VR) ...........46
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard .............261
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions) . .103
Warnings, Roll Over .................10
Warranty Information
.............337
Washers, Windshield .............59,285
Washing Vehicle..................328
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ............323
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ............323
WindBuffeting...................78
Window Fogging ..................68
Windows......................77
INDEX 345
11
Power .....................77
ResetAuto-Up .................78
Windshield Defroster ...............259
Windshield Washers..............59,285
Fluid .....................285
Windshield Wiper Blades .............291
Windshield Wipers .................59
Wipers Blade Replacement ............291
Wipers,Intermittent.................60
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ...............60
Wireless Charging Pad ...............76
346 INDEX
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear
gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual
may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/
or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-833-667-4825 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or
purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an
accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their
attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the
driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done
while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your
vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with
all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Wagoneer vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or
your local Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the
legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have
been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
2022 GRAND WAGONEER/WAGONEER
OWNER’S MANUAL
2022 GRAND WAGONEER
WAGONEER
Sixth Edition
22_WS_OM_EN_USC
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an
accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Wagoneer brand vehicle. Simply download the
app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword
“Wagoneer” (U.S. residents only).
©2023 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Wagoneer is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Wagoneer est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
